Home

Series PD English User`s Manual Rev A

1. Hardware Device Name Configuration Network Identifies the controllers name The controller can be browsed using this name via NetBIOS Hardware Device Watlow Device Information Name Identifies the controllers Watlow name The controller can be browsed using this name Hardware Device Name Configuration Network Identifies the controllers name The controller can be browsed using this name via NetBIOS Hardware Device Always Device Information Name Identifies the name that con troller can always be accessed via NetBIOS Hardware Net IP Resolution Configuration Network Try DHCP server then use Identifies the order of obtain Auto IP then use fixed IP server then ing the controllers IP address address 0 use fixed IP Try DHCP server then use address 0 fixed IP address 1 Try Auto IP then use fixed IP address 2 Use Fixed IP address 3 Watlow Series PD 126 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Firmware Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Beri and Firmware Build Device Information 13 R Identifies the firmware build number Firmware ID Device Information 10 R Identifies the firmware ID number Firmware Branch Device Information 14 R Identifies the firmware branch number Firmware Prototype Version Device Information 12 R Identifies the firmware proto type version Firmware Nu
2. Watlow Series PD 128 Chapter 9 Device Config Table 10 Features PUNOUUNING fo b tee we ree eet ee eee ee Oe eee oe 130 NDOT oo ea 2 re eee a ee ee ee Ge eee ween ene 130 INFOSENSE Sensing 422462 dsvuducwed dees be gees sae 130 Calibration Offset 0 0 0 cc eee 130 Filter Time Constant 0 0 0 0 c eee eee 130 Sensor Selection 0 0 00 ee eee 131 Set Point Low Limit and High Limit 131 Voltage or Current Scaling 0 000 eee ees 131 Process Input High Scale and Low Scale 131 Load Current Monitoring 0 00 e eee eee 131 Digital INPUTS 4 eses owe tee ee eee Se eee ee eee 132 Control MethodS cu si d0264e niet eee ee ee eee een 132 Output Configuration 264246424 258200neendetendeesabe 132 Auto Manual Control 0 0 00 ees 132 On Off Control anaana ees 133 Proportional Control c co4 o b400h4n6d5 au Cee eeveweece 133 PIGOMUOl 24226456 684neensneogee ness Ee eeu eee 134 PID COMWOl 54a een techn aa eo Ee ore Se eee ew 134 Dead BANG secede ee apaeenes Gees oe ee bee ox 135 Independent Heat and Cool PID 00000 135 Mulitple PID Sets lt cnc5 e2c ded udew eee oak aoe eet besece 135 AIANNS 4526500 0Ne bowel a a een seen wae oa eae ee eee ee 136 Process or Deviation Alarms 0000 c eee eens 136 Alarm Hysteresis 24 04 d4ccudewiwbiasudwd sd sddiinawsoe 137 Alarm Latching 64 bye Gap accep ae oboe oe ok Gad ome oS 137
3. D On O O O O O O ct ct ct ct pels r pals F o lt lt lt lt Ner Ne Ne Ner Watlow Series PD Chapt er 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Control Loop 1 Switch To Monitor Device Digital Input 3 Set Point Status Indicates that Digital Input 3 is forcing Control Loop 1 to use the Digital Set Point Control Loop 2 Switch To Digital Input 3 Set Point Status Indicates that Digital Input 3 is forcing Control Loop 2 to use the Digital Set Point Monitor Device Control Loop 1 Switch To Digital Input 4 Set Point Status Indicates that Digital Input 4 is forcing Control Loop 1 to use the Digital Set Point Monitor Device Control Loop 2 Switch To Digi Monitor Device tal Input 4 Set Point Status Indicates that Digital Input 4 is forcing Control Loop 2 to use the Digital Set Point Digital Input 3 Set Point Control Loop Select the control loop affected by the Digital Set Point for Digital Input 3 Monitor Device Monitor Device Digital Input 4 Set Point Control Loop Select the control loop affected by the Digital Set Point for Digital Input 4 Web Page Your Range Settings Inactive 0 Active 1 Inactive 0 Active 1 Inactive 0 Active 1 Inactive 0 Active 1 Default Modbus Read write and scaling Watlow Series PD 19
4. 11 Subnet Mask 12 Default Gateway 13 Fixed DNS Server Parameter Description Sets the Netbios name Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters Valid characters are 0 9 A Z a z and The default device name is PDXXXXXX where XXXXXX is the serial number Not all com puter networking configurations support Netbios names Displays current IP address number Series PD supports DHCP client AutoIP and Fixed IP address assignment Displays current subnet mask Displays current default gateway Displays current DNS server Sets the IP address resolution method to try DHCP first If unsuc cessful try AutoIP next and finally Fixed IP to get an IP address Sets the IP address resolution method to try DHCP first If unsuc cessful try Fixed IP to get an IP address Sets the IP address resolution method to try AutolP first If unsuc cessful try Fixed IP to get an IP address Sets the IP address resolution method to Fixed IP to get an IP address Fixed IP address if entered Fixed default gateway if entered Fixed subnet mask if entered Fixed DNS server if entered Figure 46 Network Configuration Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 46 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Email Configuration Page The Email Configuration page sets up the email capabilities for the Series PD Alarms can be configured to send out an email when the alarm trips Be sure to work with your network administra
5. w allow PO ILD ata INT 22 Decimal Aw atow _PE 0 AB ETHERNET_ w atow PO O Data IMT 10 Decimal 159 Although the size for the Configuration Assembly was set to zero and is not used the system automatically assigns 400 signed integer bytes for the configuration The PD inputs and outputs were sized correctly at 22 INT s and 10 INT s respectively It will be these tags that will ultimately be used to read from and write to the PD As we have already learned the data format within the PD varies depending on the specific tags needing to be used This can be seen clearly in the tables found in sections 2 2 1 through 2 2 4 Note also that the Comm Format applied to the module above figure 3 1 applies to all assemblies regardless of their native format With this in mind the programming examples below were created with the desire to simplify the transfer of data to and from the controller to the various PD assemblies To accomplish this user defined data types were created for the purpose of reflecting the O gt T andthe T gt O assembly structures In comparing the structure of the screen shot below with the tables found in sections 2 2 1 and 2 2 3 you will see a close resemblance In taking a closer look you will see that each of the members in both data types T gt O and the O gt T correspond directly to the above mentioned tables Figure 3 1c iH Data Type PD_Static_Assembly PD Control EAE Hame PD_Static
6. 47 48 R 1000 53 54 R 1000 57 58 R 1000 Watlow Series PD OD ce Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Your Settings Web Page Range Modbus Read write and scaling Default Analog Input 1 Error Status Display active errors for analog input Analog Input 2 Error Status Display active errors for analog input Analog Input 3 Error Status Display active errors for analog input Analog Input 4 Error Status Display active errors for analog input Analog Input 1 Sensor Type Set the analog sensor type Analog Input 1 TC Type Set the thermocouple type Analog Input 1 RTD Curve Set the RTD linearization Analog Input 1 Process Precision Set the decimal place for the input value when utilizing process type input that will be displayed in the browser only Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Device Informatiogura None 0 tion Analog Input 1 RTD 2 Configuration Analog Input 1 Configuration Analog Input 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 2 0 000 3 Configuration Analog Input 1 No Fault 0 Ambient Fault 1 Under Range Fault 2 Over Range Fault 3 Under Flow Fault 4 Over Flow Fault 5 INFOSENSE Fault 6 Lead Compensation Fault 7 No Fault 0 Ambient Fault 1
7. Hardware Net Fixed Gate way Identifies the Fixed Gateway IP address Hardware Net Fixed DNS Identifies the Fixed DNS server address Hardware Part Number Display the controllers s part number Hardware Actual IP Identifies the IP address currently being utilized Hardware Actual Subnet Identifies the IP Subnet mask currently being utilized Hardware Actual Gateway Identifies the Gateway IP address currently being utilized Hardware Actual DNS Identifies the DNS server IP address currently being utilized Hardware MAC Address String Identifies the MAC address of the controller Web Page Your Range Default Modbus Settings Read write and scaling Configuration Network 2147483647 to 2147483647 1062731775 R W Configuration Network 2147483647 to 2147483647 65536 R W Configuration Network 2147483647 to 2147483647 R W 1062731775 1062731775 Configuration Network 2147483647 to 2147483647 R W Device Information Ea R W Configuration Network Configuration Network 2147483647 to 2147483647 R Configuration Network 2147483647 to 2147483647 R Configuration Network 2147483647 to 2147483647 R Configuration Network 2147483647 to 2147483647 R Configuration Network R Watlow Series PD 125 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling
8. R W From Server Name 0 1062731775 R W R W R W R W R W R W Watlow Series PD 116 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Network gt Security Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling Security Monitor User Name Configuration Security Identify the User Name for password protection of the Monitor page Security Monitor Password Configuration Security Identify the Password for access to the Monitor page Security Configuration User Configuration Security Name Identify the User Name for password protection of the Configuration page Security Configuration Configuration Security Password Identify the Password for access to the Configuration page Security Administration User Configuration Security Name Identify the User Name for password protection of the Calibration page Security Administration Configuration Security Password Identify the Password for access to the Calibration page Watlow Series PD 117 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Datalogging gt Settings Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Seon tsa and Datalog Enabled Configuration Data 1209 R W Enable datalogging logging Settings No 0 Yes 1 1 to 200 Seconds 118
9. Read write and scaling Off 0 Off 0 351 R W Acknowledge Alarm 1 Switch To Manual Control 2 Switch Control Loop Off 8 Digital Set Point 4 Pause Data Logging 5 False 0 False 0 352 R W True 1 Inactive 0 Inactive 0 61 R Active 1 Silence Alarm 0 Silence Alarm 368 R W Acknowledge Alarm 1 0 Silence and Acknowledge Alarm 2 No 0 No 0 353 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 354 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 355 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 No 0 357 R W Yes 1 Watlow Series PD 71 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling No 0 No 0 358 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 359 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 360 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 361 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 362 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 363 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 364 R W Yes 1 75000 366 367 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD 72 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Digital Input 3 Select Configuration Digital Acknowledge Alarm 6 Input 3 Select to use Digital Input 3 to acknowledge Alarm 6 Digital Input 3 Select Configuration Digital Acknowledge Alarm 7 Input 3 Select to use Digital Input 3 to acknowledge Alarm 7 Configuration Digital Input 3 Select to use Digital Input 3 to acknowledge Alarm 8 Digital Input 3 Switc
10. Sets the high range value for the voltage input signal For exam ple if you need 1 5 Vdc set high voltage scale to 5 Sets the low range value for the current input signal For exam ple if you need 4 20 mA set low current scale to 4 Sets the high range value for the current input signal For exam ple if you need 4 20 mA set high current scale to 20 Sets the temperature measurement units Celcius or Fahrenheit Selects the decimal location for temperature inputs 0 or 0 0 Selects the filtering action for the input signal Off disabled or First Order Sets the time constant for the first order filter 0 1 to 60 0 seconds Temperature Process Value Configuration Shifts the input signal up or down Figure 30 Analog Input Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 30 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Digital Input Configuration Page Inputs 3 and 4 can be ordered as digital inputs The digital input accepts a contact closure or a dc voltage input and performs some function based upon the digital event input status For example when the digital event input is low switch to a different auto set point value If the digital event input goes back high switch back to the original control auto set point value See Features chapter You can see and change all of the parameters on the Digital Input Configuration page Only those that apply to the function selected will be relevant For example you can set all of th
11. Output 1 Current Low Scale Set unit value for low end of current range This setting determines range of output Output 1 Current High Scale Set unit value for high end of current range This setting determines range of output Output 1 Voltage Low Scale Set unit value for low end of voltage range This setting determines range of output Output 1 Voltage High Scale Set unit value for high end of voltage range This setting determines range of output Output 1 Retransmit Source Select which source Output 1 will retransmit Output 1 Retransmit Low Scale Set low end of the current or voltage range for the retrans mit signal Output 1 Retransmit High Scale Set high end of the current or voltage range for the retrans mit signal Output 1 Retransmit Offset Set the offset value for the re transmit signal Output 1 State Display state of output Watlow Series PD Current 1 Configuration Output 1 0 to 20000 units Configuration Output 1 0 to 20000 units Configuration Output 1 0 to 10000 units Configuration Output 1 0 to 10000 units Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 2 Set Point 1 1 Set Point 2 3 Configuration Output 1 Configuration Output 1 degrees or units Configuration Output 1 degrees or units Configuration Output 1 grees or units Inactive 0 Active 1 2000000200 to 2000000200 2000000200 to 2000000200 9999000 to 9999000 de 410 411
12. erated This selection will latch intermittent error Off 0 Off 0 780 R W On 1 No 0 Yes 1 50 R W Yes 1 10000 to 10000 two decimal places Analog Input 2 Failure Monitor Device Latching Acknowledge Allow latched inputs errors to be acknowleded and cleared if sensor is repaired Loop 2 Failure Fixed Power Configuration Loop Select output power level to Settings 2 apply if sensor on input pro duces errors and transition to manual open loop occurs Watlow Series PD 68 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Inputs gt CT Inputs 3 and 4 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Bora and None 0 CT Current 6 CT Input 3 Sensor Type Configuration CT 311 R W Set the analog sensor type Input 3 CT Input 3 CT Precision Configuration CT Set the decimal place for CT Input 3 Input 3 value that will be displayed in the browser only 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 2 0 000 3 1124 R CT Input 3 CT Units Configuration CT Set the units for CT Input 3 Input 3 that will be displayed in the browser only Up to four alpha numeric 1125 1126 R characters CT Input 3 Low CT Scale Configuration CT Set unit value for low CT Input 3 scale This setting is the displayed CT value when the analog input is at minimum 30000000 to 30000000 units 30000000 316 317 R W 1000 CT In
13. 0 to 20000 units 480 481 R W 1000 Output 3 Current Low Scale Configuration Output 3 Set unit value for low end of current range This setting determines range of output 0 to 20000 units 482 483 R W 1000 Output 3 Current High Scale Configuration Output 3 Set unit value for high end of current range This setting determines range of output N A gt Oo a ia a go og N oO T Watlow Series PD 96 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Web Page Range Modbus Read write and scaling Default Output 3 Voltage Low Scale Set unit value for low end of voltage range This setting determines range of output Output 3 Voltage High Scale Set unit value for high end of voltage range This setting determines range of output Output 3 Retransmit Source Select which source Output 3 will retransmit Output 3 Retransmit Low Scale Set low end of the current or voltage range for the retrans mit signal Output 3 Retransmit High Scale Set high end of the current or voltage range for the retrans mit signal Output 3 Retransmit Offset Set the offset value for the re transmit signal Output 3 State Display state of output Watlow Series PD Configuration Output 3 Configuration Output 3 Configuration Output 3 Configuration Output 3 Configuration Output 3 Configuration Output 3 Monitor Devi
14. 1 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 6 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 6 Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Configuration Alarm 6 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 6 Configuration Alarm 6 Off 0 Process Value 3 2 Process Value 4 3 Configuration Alarm 6 30000000 to 30000000 units Modbus Read write and scaling Default E Ske 4 Inactive 0 168 R 171 172 R W 1000 603 R W 169 170 R W 1000 604 R W 173 174 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD 110 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Alarm 6 Send Email Enable Select to enable an email to be sent on activation of Alarm 6 Alarm 6 Email Alert Subject Enter subject of email for Alarm 6 This message will appear in the subject line of the sent email Alarm 6 Alarm Hysteresis Select hysteresis value Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can clear Alarm 6 Latching Enable Select to enable alarm to be latched Latched alarms must be manually cleared when the process returns to a safe value Alarm 6 Latching Action Select to cause an active alarm to clear if latching is enabled and the process returns to a safe value Alarm 6 Silence Enable Select to ena
15. 100 ppm C maximum Digital Input e Contact closure or voltage input e Input impedance 10 KQ e Sample rate 5 Hz e Resistance contact input Input high state gt 7 kQ Input low state 0 2 kQ e Voltage input Input high state 2 36 Vdc Input low state 0 1 Vdc Current Transformer Input e Input range 0 50 mA amp ac e Input impedance 100Q e Sample rate 5 Hz e Voltage input impedance 20 KQ e Current input impedance 100 Q Allowable Operating Ranges e Minimum current source resistance 1 MQ Type J 210 to 1 200 C or 346 to 2 192 F e Input resolution 25 000 bits approximately at full Type K 270 to 1 372 C or 454 to 2 502 F scale Type T 270 to 400 C or 454 to 752 F Input Accuracy Span Ranges Type N 270 to 1 300 C or 454 to 2 372 F Type J Oto 750 C or 32 to 1 382 F Type E 270 to 1000 C or 454 to L802 5 Type K 200 to 1 250 C or 328 to 2 282 F Type C 0 to 2 315 C or 32 to 4 200 F Type T 200 to 350 C or 328 to 662 F Type D _ 2 ee or eee Type N 0 to 1 250 C or 39 to 2 282 F Type PTII F 3 to 1 396 Cor 25 to 2 045 F T o o Type R 50 to 1 767 C or 58 to 3 214 F ype E 200 to 800 C or 328 to 1 470 F M l Pi Type S 50 to 1 767 C or 58 to 3 214 F Type C W5 0 to 2 315 C or 32 to 4 200 F i a R o Type B 0 to 1 820 C or 32 to 3 308 F Type D W3 0 to 2 315 C or 32 to 4 200 F DIN 900 to 800 C or 328 to 1 472 F Type PTII F 0 to 1 393 C or 32 to 2 540 F P oce s 1 99
16. 4 000 0 to 20 000 1000 ica 20 000 106 2 16 6A 2 10 Loop 1 on 30 000 000 as 68 1 1 68 2 1 68 3 1 68 4 1 68 1 6 68 2 6 68 3 6 68 4 6 68 1 83 68 2 3 68 3 83 68 4 3 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 104 1 1 104 2 1 Oft 0 104 3 1 104 4 1 104 1 6 104 2 6 Of 0 104 3 6 104 4 6 104 1 3 104 2 3 Loop 1 0 104 3 3 104 4 3 1 0 second for non mechanical relay 104 1 2 68 1 2 outputs 104 2 2 68 2 2 10 0 seconds for 104 3 2 68 3 2 mechanical relay 104 4 2 68 4 2 outputs Nn eS aM M OO nmn ee Aman x xe Se Se p S N NA xwe Se S Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 104 1 4 68 1 4 104 2 4 68 2 4 104 3 4 68 3 4 104 1 24 68 1 18 104 2 24 68 2 18 104 3 24 68 3 18 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 104 1 25 68 1 19 104 2 25 68 2 19 104 3 25 68 3 19 10 000 104 1 19 68 1 13 104 3 19 68 3 13 Output 1 104 1 22 68 1 16 Output 3 104 3 22 68 3 16 104 1 21 68 1 15 104 3 21 68 3 15 Addressing Information rev c 106 1 16 6A 1 10 673 674 193 794 106 1 17 6A 1 11 675 675 106 2 17 6A 2 11 795 796 oe ve ee 391 431 461 501 398 438 468 508 393 433 463 503 392 432 462 502 449 450 488 489 519 520 420 421 451 452 490 49
17. 5403 4646 Watlow Korea Co Ltd 3rd F Taehong Bldg 20 6 Seocho gu Yangjae dong Seoul Korea 137 130 Telephone 82 2 575 9804 Fax 82 2 575 9831 Watlow Malaysia Sdn Bhd 38B Jalan Tun Dr Awang 11900 Bayan Lepas Penang Malaysia Telephone 60 4 641 5977 Fax 60 4 641 5979 Watlow Singapore Pte Ltd Ayer Rajah Crescent 03 23 Ayer Rajah Industrial Estate Singapore 139949 Telephone 65 773 9488 Fax 65 778 0323 Watlow Electric Taiwan 10F 1 No 189 Chi Shen 2nd Road Kaohsiung Taiwan Telephone 886 7 288 5168 Fax 886 7 288 5568 Series PD amp EtherNet IP Addendum WATLOW PD PID Controller ap Power Ethernet Link Ethernet Activity Module Status Network Status aO Input Error aO Input Error Output Output Output Output A WATLOW 1241 Bundy Boulevard Winona Minnesota USA 55987 Phone 1 507 454 5300 Fax 1 507 452 4507 http www watlow com Rev B December 2006 1 0 2 0 PD amp EtherNet IP Introduction to EtherNet IP With the introduction of the first Programmable Logic Controllers PLC s in the early to mid 1970 s it quickly became apparent that there was a need to communicate from one PLC to another and then on a wider scale from PLC to other computers within the company infrastructure Some of those needs involved applications with interlinking processes such as batch processes or assembly lines utilizing multiple controls where better sync
18. Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can clear Alarm 5 Latching Enable Select to enable alarm to be latched Latched alarms must be manually cleared when the process returns to a safe value Alarm 5 Latching Action Select to cause an active alarm to clear if latching is enabled and the process returns to a safe value Alarm 5 Silencing Enable Select to enable alarm silenc ing Silencing allows the oper ator to disable alarm while the controller is in an alarm state Alarm 5 Silence Action Select to cause an active alarm to silence if silencing is enabled Alarm 5 Blocking Select to prevent a low alarm from triggering when the process temperature is initial ly lower than the alarm set point due to power on or set point change Also applies to high alarms Web Page Your Range Default Modbus Settings Read write and scaling No 0 Yes 1 Configuration Alarm 5 of 3000 595 596 R W 1000 No 0 No 0 594 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 163 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 593 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 162 R W Yes 1 Up to 30 alpha numeric characters Configuration Alarm 5 0 to 2000000200 degrees or units Configuration Alarm 5 Configuration Alarm 5 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 5 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 5 Power On 2 Set Point Change and Power O
19. Configuration Alarm 3 Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 3 Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 1 Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 3 degrees or units Configuration Alarm 3 Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 3 degrees or units Off 0 Process Value 3 2 Process Value 4 3 Configuration Alarm 3 Configuration Alarm 3 30000000 to 30000000 2000000200 to 2000000200 30000000 to 30000000 units Modbus Read write and scaling Inactive 0 129 R 132 133 R W 1000 130 131 R W 1000 Default 562 R W 134 135 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD 104 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling Alarm 3 Send Email Enable No 0 R W Select to enable an email to be sent on activation of Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Email Alert Subject Enter subject of email for Alarm 3 This message will appear in the subject line of the sent email Up to 30 alpha numeric characters 0 to 2000000200 degrees or 567 568 R W units 1000 Off 0 564 R W Set Point Change 1 Power On 2 Set Point Change and Power On 3 Watlow Series PD 105 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Alarm 3 Alarm Hysteresis Con
20. Hw 166 The Class Instance and Attribute to start Autotune in the PD follow Class 101 Instance 1 Attribute 44 In this example the above values would be loaded into the tags identified below in Hex as Class 65 Instance 1 Attribute 2c Figure 4 0c New Dynamic Assembly New Dynamic Assembly Port New Dynamic Assembly Class SINT New Dynamic Assembly Instance SINT New Dynamic Assembly Attibute SINT The source length is set at 3 bytes above and will always be 3 bytes when performing this operation increasing or decreasing the assembly size The last part of the configuration is to identify the path to the PD Click on the communications tab and then click the browse button Select the PD and click OK The configuration is now complete Figure 4 0d Message Configuration MSG1 Configuration Communication Taq Fath Watlow PD Browse What PO EE Message Path Browser MA atlow POD Wy atlar PO 3 6 140 Configuration A 1 1756 ENET 44 EIP_ Scanner Al ETHERNET MOOULE Wathow PD Cancel Help Error Path Error T ext OF Cancel Help The ODT Dynamic Assembly will be increased after enabling the MSG instruction below Figure 4 0e Increase Dynamic_Aesembly Size O2T write_once _ _ _fons Sts Type CIP Generic Message Control Msc I he RI 167 The last step in this process is to go offline and reconfigure the PD ou
21. R W Process Value 3 2 30000000 to 30000000 units 147 148 R W 1000 Process Value 4 3 Watlow Series PD 106 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling No 0 No 0 R W Yes 1 Up to 30 alpha numeric R W characters 0 to 2000000200 degrees or 3000 581 582 R W units 1000 No 0 No 0 580 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 150 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 579 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 149 R W Yes 1 Off 0 Off 0 578 R W Set Point Change 1 Power On 2 Set Point Change and Power On 3 Watlow Series PD 107 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Alarm 4 Send Email Enable Configuration Alarm 4 Select to enable an email to be sent on activation of Alarm 4 Alarm 4 Email Alert Subject Configuration Alarm 4 Enter subject of email for Alarm 4 This message will appear in the subject line of the sent email Alarm 4 Alarm Hysteresis Configuration Alarm 4 Select hysteresis value Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can clear Alarm 4 Latching Enable Configuration Alarm 4 Select to enable alarm to be latched Latched alarms must be manually cleared when the process returns to a safe value Alarm 4 Latching Action Monitor Device Select to cause an active alarm to clear if latching
22. e Input 2 isolated from Input 1 o o 8 INFOSENSE P DATA f 6 f 6 o oO 5 a 5 INFOSENSE P GND Figure 7c 2 Wire RTD Input 1 100 DIN curve 0 00385 Q Q C all model numbers Terminals 9 and 11 must be shorted for a two wire RTD e Nominal excitation current 250 uA E 11 S2 o7 10 S1 9 Figure 7d 3 Wire RTD Input 1 100 DIN curve 0 00385 Q Q C all model numbers The S1 lead usually white must be connected to terminal 10 e Nominal excitation current 250 uA Syjgpey_12_INFOSENSE P DATA 11 S2 im 11 S2 10 S1 or 9 S3 on INFOSENSE P GND 7 Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life A WARNING Process input may not have sensor break protec tion Outputs can remain full on Watlow Series PD Figure 8a 2 Wire RTD Input 2 100 Q DIN curve 0 00385 Q Q C PDD ___ _ ee Terminals 5 and 7 must be shorted for a two wire RTD e Nominal excitation current 250 uA i Sg 7 S2 o 6 S1 o g 3 Figure 8b 3 Wire RTD Input 2 100 DIN curve 0 00385 Q Q C PDD _ __ _ _ e The S1 lead usually white must be connected to terminal 6 e
23. m noo oo i Cross rer Poon fa Tia PID Set Ho 4 Prop Band Lateral Derrvatire Dead Band eae hine per Repeat Minutes pa Meat edrech fond Lire tress rer Poot PID Set No Heat mirech Coen rect Buteni Reset poa Ha i T i fa 7 i z B Ei E Ld i T T Integral himies per Repeat po po Derrvatier T Dead Band mi gt Figure 37 Multiple PID Loop Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 37 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Multiple PID Loop Configuration Parameters 1 Cross Over Source PID Set No 1 Prop Band 2 Heat indirect P Cool direct PID Set No 1 Integral 4 Heat indirect P Cool direct PID Set No 1 Derivative 6 Heat indirect Cool direct PID Set No 1 Dead Band 8 Heat indirect Cool direct PID Set No 1 Cross Over Point 10 Cross Over Point Parameter Description Sets the source that triggers switching PID sets Process or Set Point Sets the proportional band value for the heat outputs Sets the proportional band value for the cool outputs Sets the integral value for the cool outputs Sets the derivative value for the heat outputs Sets the integral value for the heat outputs Sets the der
24. messaging with full support for peer to peer and multi master configurations PD Connectivity over EtherNet IP Prior to establishing communications with the PLC the PD must be connected into the network and either assume or be given an IP address There are several ways that an IP address can be established i e DHCP Auto IP or fixed IP address For more detail on how to do this please refer to the section entitled Network Services found in Chapter 4 on page 21 Make note of the IP address once established for it will be needed when configuring the module 2 1 I O Configuration using an Allen Bradley ControlLogix Processor Depending on the controller used the actual setup steps defined below may vary The specific control used in the examples given is a ControlLogix 1756 L1 Follow the steps below to add and configure the PD as a generic Ethernet module 1 After configuring the 1756 ENBT A EtherNet IP scanner right click on it and add a new module 152 E Controller test Controller Tags J Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler Tasks 3 Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Trends J Data Types Cia User Defined Ca Strings C Predefined Cia Module Defined E 1o Configuration A 1 1756 ENBT A Etherne Figure 2 1 Select Module Type Type ETHERNET MODULE Type Description 1757 Foundation Fieldbus Linking Device 1757 Foundation Fieldbus Process Controller 10 10
25. tion can be used to store operating instructions cascade style sheets custom logos system diagrams contact in formation links to web sites etc Storing HTML files with the extensions html or htm will result in hot links appearing at the bottom of the Navigation frame on the left side of the browser window Click on a hot link to open that file Data Data is logged at the specified interval for the configured PV SP LP DI or CT Watlow Series PD 141 Chapter 10 Features Data Examples Data can be logged up to once every second or any specified interval in seconds or minutes Input Process Values Working Setpoint Loop Power Optional Dis crete Inputs or Current Transformer inputs are logged at the user defined logging intervals H Sep 02 03 10 04 23 AM PV1 PV2 SP1 SP2 PL1 PL2 DI3 CT4 This header example denoted by the letter H consists of the Date Time of Day Process Variable for Input 1 and Input 2 Working Set Point for Loop 1 and 2 Power Level for Loop 1 and 2 Digital Input 3 Status and Current Transformer 4 In put Value D 10 04 23 AM 22 040 4 050 10 000 0 000 0 00 6 75 Inac tive 20 34 This header example denoted by the letter D consists of a blank space for the Date data for the Time of Day Process Variable for Input 1 Process Variable for Input 2 Working Set Point for Loop 1 Working Set Point for Loop 2 Power Level for Loop 1 Power Level for Loop 2 Digital Input 3
26. to Device Configuration gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Alarm Type and select Low Process or High Process Click the Submit button to send the new value The high process alarm set point defines the process value or temperature that triggers a high side alarm It must be between the low and high values of the sensor range The low process alarm set point defines the process or temperature that triggers a low side alarm It must be between the low and high values of the sensor range To view or change a Process Alarm Set Point go to Monitor Device gt Alarm Status gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 Set Point Enter the Alarm Set Point value and click the Submit button to send the new value or Go to Device Configuration gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Process Alarm Parameters Enter the Alarm Set Point value and click the Submit button to send the new value Deviation Alarms The deviation alarm functions of the Series PD are a bit different from other Watlow controllers These new functions along with the ability to apply basic logic functions to the alarms provide new alarm capabilities not available on previous products Deviation alarms use a set point that is defined rela tive to the auto set point Low or high deviation alarm set points are calculated by adding or subtracting offset values from the auto set point If the auto set point changes the trip point defined by the deviation alarm set point a
27. 0a M8 Module Properties ENBTA ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval AFI 10 04 me 1 0 3200 0 ms i Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller lf Connection Fails hile in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Once the module has been inhibited insert a message instruction into your program In the example logic below the O gt T Dynamic Assembly will be increased to allow for the Autotune feature to be enabled A value in this case 1 will be sent from the controller to the PD to start the Autotune feature In configuring the MSG instruction there are several points of interest that will require some focus First notice that the service type is Set Attribute The value stored in the source element New_Dynamic_Assembly will be written to the first Dynamic Assembly Point identified above in section 2 2 4 as Class 110 Instance 1 and Attribute 1 Below these values are shown on the configuration screen in Hex Figure 4 06 Message Configuration MSG Configuration Communication Tag Message Type LIP Generic Peder Set Attribute Single Source Element Mew Dynamic _Assen Ype Source Length E Buttes Service ne ja Hex Class Ge Hex ns Ea Instance 1 Attribute 1 H e aes 1 Enable 1 Enable Waiting T Stark Done Done Length O Timed Out o gt Error Code E stended Error Code Error Path Error T ext Cance
28. 1193 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 1194 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 1195 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 1196 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 1199 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 1200 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 1201 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 1202 R W Yes 1 Range Modbus Read write and scaling o Default Watlow Series PD 119 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Web Page Datalog Log Alarm 3 Status Specify to include Alarm 3 Status in datalog Datalog Log Alarm 4 Status Specify to include Alarm 4 Status in datalog Datalog Log Alarm 5 Status Specify to include Alarm 5 Status in datalog Datalog Log Alarm 6 Status Specify to include Alarm 6 Status in datalog Datalog Log Alarm 7 Status Specify to include Alarm 7 Status in datalog Datalog Log Alarm 8 Status Specify to include Alarm 8 Status in datalog Datalog Log Digital Input 3 Status Specify to include Digital Input 3 Status in datalog Datalog Log Digital Input 4 Status Specify to include Digital Input 4 Status in datalog Configuration Data logging Settings Configuration Data logging Settings Configuration Data Configuration Data logging Settings Configuration Data logging Settings Your Settings Range No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Ye
29. 3 source Output 2 Output Source Digi tal 4 Set to enable Digital Input 4 source Output 2 Output Logic Select output state in an alarm true condition Output 2 State Display state of output Web Page Your Range Default Modbus Settings Read write and scaling No 0 Yes 1 7 No 0 No 0 444 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 445 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 446 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 447 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 453 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 454 R W Yes 1 Energized 0 448 R W De energized 1 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Inactive 0 437 R Active 1 Monitor Device et es z z D et ar fale z So mo bd 2e Watlow Series PD 94 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Outputs gt Output 3 Parameter Name and Description Output 3 Function Select the function of the out put Output 3 Output Cycle Time Set the cycle time in seconds Output 3 Control Source Set Loop which will control this output Output 3 Output Mode Time Base Select method of output con trol as either Fixed Time Base or Variable Time Base Output 3 Low Power Scale Set unit value for low power scale This setting is the pro
30. Alarm Blocking 4 d 0 i i 4 0 4 54 do Ob Sere Baw egos ae bes 138 Alarm SUGNCING s 04 25 0040 abe oe dees weed EA ae ode A 138 INGIWONK 6 bc ceod wae wee me See eee eae eee oe we ee ce ee ee 138 Met ces ween cee oad e E E et abe oa eee are ee te 138 Bizitcea eij o 24 4 tar dace on wm arate horas wo trated E dats 139 TFTP Server Configuration 0 0000 cee eee 140 Datalogging Clock naunan ogee eae eee dae a eee ae 140 Pile MANAGE n bauer nates Oboe bee bene ee 141 WED VIEW 6 a5 Ga wad ks noes ee eee eee ee eee ee oe 142 LOGO aa oyun r eee bees PaeG Gee ea eee pee ee 142 Cascade Style SheetS 0 0 00 eee 142 Panel 24 cues acs paket NETTE ook ae eee ee wae aed 5 143 Trend Information 0000 eee es 143 Communications gern cseccs an decd wes Opes chee ces 143 Watlow Series PD 129 Chapter 10 Features Autotuning The autotuning feature allows the controller to measure the system response to determine effective set tings for PID control When autotuning is initiated the controller reverts to on off control The temperature must cross the Autotune Set Point four times to com plete the autotuning process Once complete the con troller controls at the normal set point using the new parameters To initiate an autotune go to Device Configura tion gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings and click the Start Autotune button During an auto tune Control Loop Status indicates Autot
31. Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 Parameter Name and Description Loop 1 Closed Loop Indirect Power Display indirect heat power applied based on the PID calculations Loop 1 Closed Loop Direct Power Display direct cool power applied based on the PID calculations Loop 1 Working Set Point Active set point Could be one of several set point sources Auto Set Point Digital Set Point or Ramp to Set Point Loop 1 Auto Set Point Display the closed loop auto set point for control loop Loop 1 Manual Auto Mode Transitions between open loop manual and closed loop auto control Loop 1 Manual Set Point Display the open loop manu al set point for control loop Loop 1 Loop Action Select the action of the Loop as Indirect heat only Direct cool only or Dual heat cool Loop 1 Loop Indirect Heat Algorithm Select method of control algo rithm used for Indirect Heat for Loop 1 Loop 1 Loop Direct Cool Algorithm Select method of control algo rithm used for Direct Cool for Loop 1 Loop 1 Failure Latching Web Page Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 C
32. D ata S Wy atlows POO OD atale wallow POO OD ata Wi atlow POO DOD atals We atlow POO OD atals watkow PO O D atali 0 T i Fe Fe Ee ee a a SE ETHERNWET_ MOOCULE_IN IN T 11 IMT IMT INT IMT INT IMT IMT IMT IMT INT INT This procedure can be duplicated to increase either the OMT or the T gt O Dynamic Assemblies What would change would be the assembly instance size where this would be dependent on the attribute you are seeking to read from or write to 168 Name and Description a tevations j Defaut EIP Decimal re Modbus __ _EIP Date Type _ EIP Data Type Access Monitor Device 65 1 3 35 36 65 1 8 47 48 ee ae a _ ma Monitor Device ANAO INPUT EOF AIH ACINA FTOCSSS Vale 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 porary Input 1 101 1 3 Indicates the process value displayed on web page Monitor Device 1000 Analoa inputa 101 1 8 Digital np or Vae used by the control loop gone Indicates the state of the ote end input Monitor Device meee Active 1 Digital Input 4 DAGING 101 1 26 E 68 Bale ee eae meen a ats a b Monitor Device 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 CT Input 3 101 1713 65 1 D E J 34 DINT p PSO RWERPaJE 1000 CT Input 4 101 1 18 65 1 12 58 and used by the control loop Analog Input 1 to 4 Error Status No Fault 0 Display active errors for the analog input Ambient Fault 1 Under Range Fault 2 Over Range Fault 3 COo aA Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 Analog Inp
33. De vice Configuration gt Inputs gt Analog Input 1 or 2 gt Single Offset Value Enter an offset value and click the Submit button to send the new values Negative Calibration Offset will compensate for the difference between the Sensor Reading and the Actual Temperature a Temperature Reading from Sensor Temperature Actual Process Temperature Time Filter Time Constant Filtering smoothes an input signal by applying a first order filter time constant to the signal Filtering the input signal may improve the performance of PID control in a noisy or very dynamic system To view or change the filter time constant value go to Device Configuration gt Inputs gt Analog Input 1 or 2 gt Input Filtering Filter Method and select First Order Enter a Filter Time Base value and click the Submit button to send the new value Unfiltered Input Signal Temperature Time Filtered Input Signal Temperature Time Chapter 10 Features Sensor Selection You need to configure the controller to match the in put device which is normally a thermocouple RTD or process transmitter When you select an input device the controller automatically sets the input linearization to match the sensor It also sets high and low limits which in turn limit the set point range high and range low values To view or change the sensor type go to Device Configuration gt Inputs gt Analog Input 1 or 2 gt Analog Input Sen
34. If configured to send an email and the Network Email is properly configured the Series PD will send an email indicating the File System is full To resume logging data delete one or more files in the File System Write Log File To TFTP Server Yes This option allows the Series PD to transfer completed data log files to a computer for long term storage The File System has a fixed file size of approximately 190k bytes per file and a maximum of 10 files As each file is completed the system will automatically transfer the completed file to the TFTP Server computer No The Series PD does not attempt to write log files to a TFTP server Chapter 10 Features TFTP Server Configuration There are a number of TFTP servers available on the web Search the web on the keywords TFTP server e The TFTP server should preferably be located on the same subnet as the Series PD e The TFTP Server should also be configured to write all files to a predetermined folder e Some TF TP server configurations allow only a se lect range or specific IP addresses to access the server This may be set to accept files from any number of Se ries PD Each file will be uniquely identified by the Series PD name and file start date and time in this directory e It is advisable to configure the TFTP server to reject du plicate inbound files When the Series PD is restart ed it will attempt to write all files in the file system to the TFTP server The
35. Loop 1 PID Set 4 Indirect Configuration Multiple Integral PID Sets 1 Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat 0 to 9990 minutes 731 732 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 4 Indirect Configuration Multiple Derivative PID Sets 1 Set the heat indirect deriva tive time in minutes 725 726 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 4 Indirect Configuration Multiple Dead Band PID Sets 1 Set the offset of the heat indi rect proportional band from set point in process units 0 to 999000 degrees or units 735 736 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 4 Direct Configuration Multiple Prop Band PID Sets 1 Set the cool direct propor tional band from set point in process units 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 0 to 99990 minutes 737 738 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 4 Direct Configuration Multiple Integral PID Sets 1 Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat 0 to 9990 minutes 739 740 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 4 Direct Configuration Multiple Derivative PID Sets 1 Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes 733 734 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 4 Direct Configuration Multiple Dead Band PID Sets 1 Set the offset of the cool direct proportional band from set point in process units 0 to 999000 degrees or units 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units 30000000 675 676 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 4 Crossover Configuration Loop Point Settings 1 Set cro
36. Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default ___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type_ Access Silencing Alarm 1 105 1 6 69 1 6 Select whether to allow the operator to disable the Alarm 2 alarm output before the process value returns to Alarm 3 normal Alarm 1 to 8 Alarm 4 Configuration Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Blocking Alarm 1 105 1 5 69 1 5 Select to block this alarm until the process value Off 0 Alarm 2 105 2 5 69 2 5 enters the normal range after turning the power on Set Point Change 1 Alarm 3 105 3 5 69 3 5 or after a set point change Alarm 1 to 8 Poweron 3 Alarm 4 105 4 5 69 4 5 omouanen Set Point Change and Aarme 0816 8 6916 8 power cas Alarm 7 105 7 5 69 7 5 Alarm 8 634 Device Configuration gt Network gt Email E r CPE I TO er S en SE SMTP Server IP Resolution Device Configuration Server Name 0 Specify the method to determine the SMTP server Network Server Name 0 Web page only Web page only R W Email Fixed Address 1 SMTP Server Name Device Configuration Specify the SMTP server name Network Web page only Web page only R W Email SMTP Server Fixed Address Device Configuration 2 147 483 647 to Specify the SMTP server s fixed IP address Network Se hte rae 1 062 731 775 Web page only Web page only R W Email 2 147 483 647 Source Email Address Device Configuration Specify the return source of submitted email This Network Web page only Web page only R W sou
37. Nominal excitation current 250 uA oo 8_INFOSENSE DATA zi 7_ S2 q 7 2 ia B o miN o gl o 5 S3 o E INFOSENSE GND Figure 8c Input 1 0 to 10V dc Process Input all model numbers e Input impedance 20 KQ dc only 12 Figure 8d Input 2 0 to 10V dc Process Input PDD __ _ _ _ e Input impedance 20 KQ dc only e Input 2 isolated from Input 1 8 D o 8 Chapter 2 Install and Wire AN Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life A WARNING Process input may not have sensor break protec tion Outputs can remain full on Note Install a 1kQ pull down resistor for each digital in put using voltage inputs Note Install a 10kQ pull up re sistor for each digital input using contact closure in puts Watlow Series PD Figure 9a Input 1 0 to 20 mA Process Input all model numbers e Input impedance 100 Q dc only e Controller does not supply power for the current loop 11 o 9 101112 Figure 9b Input 2 0 to 20 mA Process Input PDD e Input impedance 100 Q dc only e Controller does not supply power for the current loop e Input 2 isolated from Input 1 e Input impedance 10kQ dc
38. Pas 318 319 338 339 eae CT Input 3 102 3 4 66 3 4 312 313 O19 30 900 H009 CT Input 4 a 102 4 4 66 4 4 332 333 DUNT jaw 314 315 334 335 cub ci 322 320 321 340 341 ca a 17 NO Name and Description Range Scaling tevations j Defaut EIP Decimal ELF Decimal Hex _ Modbus EIP Data Type Access Device Configuration gt Inputs gt Digital Input 3 or 4 TA ae eae een are ree Pasa anti cpm neta Function Off 0 Set the function for the digital input Acknowledge Alarm 1 Switch To Manual Control Digital Input 3 or 4 2 Digital Input 3 Off 0 103 1 1 67 1 1 351 UINT R W Configuration Switch Control Loop Off Digital Input 4 103 2 1 67 2 1 371 3 Digital Setpoint 4 Pause Data Loggi Active State Aa Nee Digital Input 3 or 4 False 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 2 67 1 2 352 ee state will activate the digital input Configuration True 1 Digital Input 4 False 0 103 2 2 67 2 2 371 UINT R W Acknowlege Alarm Alarm Action Silence Alarm 0 Select what action will occur when the digital input Digital Input 3 or 4 Acknowledge ae Digital Input 3 Silence Alarm 0 103 1 17 67 1 11 368 UINT R W is used to acknowledge an alarm Configuration Silence and ee Digital Input 4 103 2 17 67 2 11 388 Acknowledge Alarm 1 ahs ere Die oa Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 3 67 1 3 353 maa tne Piga Input toaennowlecge Configuration Yes 1 Digital Input 4 mono 103 2 3 67 2 3 373 a nu A e
39. Point value and click the Submit button to send the new value or Go to Device Configuration gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Process Alarm Parameters Enter the Alarm Set Point value and click the Submit button to send the new value Chapter 10 Features Alarm Hysteresis An alarm state is triggered when the process value reaches the alarm high or alarm low set point Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can be cleared Alarm hysteresis is a zone inside each alarm set point This zone is defined by adding the hysteresis val ue to the alarm low set point or subtracting the hystere sis value from the alarm high set point To view or change the Alarm Hysteresis go to De vice Configuration gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt General Alarm Settings gt Alarm Hysteresis Enter the Alarm Hysteresis value and click the Submit button to send the new value High Side Alarm Range Alarm High Set Point y Alarm Hysteresis lemperature Normal Operating Range 4 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Low Set Point Low Side Alarm Range Time Watlow Series PD 137 Alarm Latching A latched alarm will remain active after the alarm condition has passed It can only be deactivated by the user An alarm that is not latched self clearing will de activate automatically when the alarm condition has passed To view or change Alarm Latching go to D
40. Process Value 3 2 Process Value 4 3 Configuration Alarm 7 30000000 to 30000000 units Configuration Alarm 7 Watlow Series PD 112 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling No 0 No 0 R W Yes 1 Up to 30 alpha numeric R W characters 0 to 2000000200 degrees or 13000 623 624 R W units 1000 No 0 No 0 622 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 189 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 621 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 188 R W Yes 1 Off 0 620 R W Set Point Change 1 Power On 2 Set Point Change and Power On 3 Watlow Series PD 113 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Alarm 7 Send Email Enable Configuration Alarm 7 Select to enable an email to be sent on activation of Alarm 7 Alarm 7 Email Alert Subject Configuration Alarm 7 Enter subject of email for Alarm 7 This message will appear in the subject line of the sent email Alarm 7 Alarm Hysteresis Configuration Alarm 7 Select hysteresis value Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can clear Alarm 7 Latching Enable Configuration Alarm 7 Select to enable alarm to be latched Latched alarms must be manually cleared when the process returns to a safe value Alarm 7 Latching Action Monitor Device Select to cause an active alarm to cle
41. SATISFACTION a Your Authorized Watlow Distributor Corporate Headquarters in the U S Watlow Electric Manufacturing Co 12001 Lackland Road St Louis Missouri USA 63146 Telephone 1 314 878 4600 Fax 1 314 878 6814 Europe Watlow GmbH Industriegebiet Heidig Lauchwasenstr 1 Postfach 1165 Kronau 76709 Germany Telephone 49 0 7253 9400 0 Fax 49 0 7253 9400 901 Watlow France S A R L Immeuble Somag 16 Rue Amp re Cergy Pontoise CEDEX 95307 France Telephone 33 1 3073 2425 Fax 33 1 3073 2875 Watlow Italy S R L Via Meucci 14 20094 Corsico MI Italy Telephone 39 02 4588841 Fax 39 02 458 69954 Watlow Limited Robey Close Linby Industrial Estate Linby Nottingham England NG15 8AA Telephone 44 0 115 9640777 Fax 44 0 115 9640071 Latin America Watlow de M xico Av Fundici n 5 Col Parques Industriales Quer taro Qro M xico CP 76130 Telephone 52 442 217 6235 Fax 52 442 217 6403 Asia Pacific Watlow Australia Pty Ltd 23 Gladstone Park Drive Tullamarine Victoria 3043 Australia Telephone 61 39 335 6449 Fax 61 39 330 3566 Watlow China Inc 179 Zhong Shan Xi Road Hong Qiao Cointek Bldg FI 4 Unit P Shanghai 200051 China Telephone 86 21 6229 8917 Fax 86 21 6228 4654 Watlow Japan Ltd K K Azabu Embassy Heights 106 1 11 12 Akasaka Minato ku Tokyo 107 0052 Japan Telephone 81 03 5403 4688 Fax 81 03
42. Select the software package based on what is re quired for the application For basic communications such as reading the process value or setting the set point use the browser interface This is mainly used for configuration diagnostics and basic communications When purchasing a third party software package be sure to look for a package that is Modbus TCP compati ble or has Modbus TCP drivers Most third party pack ages require you to specify the Modbus registers of the controller to setup the package Another option is to custom create a software pack age Using the Modbus register and data information in this user s manual a software package can be created and tailored to the desired application 3 Configure the software s communications pa rameters A software package be it software for a computer a PLC or an OIT will need to be configured such as the TCP IP address Watlow Series PD 143 4 Start communications with the controller With the communications successfully verified the software is now ready for use with the controller The above guidelines are the general steps to establishing communications Some applications may require other steps not mentioned but would follow the same general process 5 Programming and configuring the controllers When programming and configuring the controllers with a software program a couple of things must be kept in mind If the software allows changing De
43. Series PD 32 Chapter 7 Configuration Page CT current transformer Input Configuration Page The CT input accepts a signal from a CT monitoring heater current The CT develops an output signal propor tional to the current flowing through the wire passing through the center hole of the CT You can assign one or more alarm outputs to any CT input The alarm can be configured to trip if the heater current gets too low or too high The CT input cannot be used with a process output See Features chapter Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD Trend Information Device Information Dever Configuration El fot CT ipui d H Covet loops E Chapter Hine A Mateos E Ping EFi See Ca Serato Bari Vrued a 1E HEH TO ot Wirel 1 0 2 S e Tes PD Tis page was loaded fom PORE on Er Sep IF 0230 27 J003 CT Input righe Current Transformer Parameters CT FPretmion CT Umts Low CT Scale High CT Scale Low Curent Scale High Curent Scale Ctp Offsets Smale Ofet Vak submet Pasa jmp le Bo ange fp Oe i errs E S 50 0 m Hi 0 0 TE i w Cutput F p Figure 33 CT current transformer Input Configuration Web Page Example o amp cn amp Co ho Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 33 Chapter 7 Configuration Pa
44. Status and Current Transformer 4 In put Value Commas separate each field of the Header and Data records Information in the Header record corresponds to the value in the Data record Alarm States are logged as an event and are not sub ject to the Logging Interval setting For example if the Logging Interval is configured for 1 minute and Alarm 1 goes active several seconds after the last logging inter val a log entry will indicate the event A 10 05 01 AM Low Process Alarm 1 Active Set Point 10 000 If the alarm is cleared several seconds later this event will also be logged A 10 05 12 AM Low Process Alarm 1 Inactive Set Point 10 000 File System Web View The Web View page allows customization of the web page served by the Series PD The web banner at the top of the web page the logo and web page formatting attributes can be customized for each Series PD Logo This allows changing the logo in the upper left cor ner of the banner which can contain your company logo a picture jpg or animation file gif to identify the process or customize the appearance of the Series PD web page The Storage Device 1 file size limits approxi mately 21k per file and the banner area limit the logo size The file used for the logo can be loaded into Storage Device 1 on the File Manager page or can be called from an external HTML reference location Watlow Series PD 142 Cascade Style Sheet CSS This allows cus
45. Switching pilot duty loads relay coils solenoids etc with the mechanical relay or solid state relay output options requires use of an R C suppressor Watlow carries the R C suppres sor Quencharc brand name which is a trademark of ITW Paktron Watlow Part No 0804 0147 0000 Note A current transformer input is not available for Output 1 or 3 if a process output Note 24 V input power re quired to use single cycle vari able time base output function Watlow Series PD Figure 14a Output 1 Open Collector PD__ C___ ____ e Maximum current sink 200 mA dc e Maximum supply voltage 42V dc e Output does not supply power Class 2 power source required for agency compliance Open Collector Figure 14b Output 1 Process PD__ F___ ____ e Analog output is scalable between 0 to 10V dc or 0 to 20 mA dc e Load capability voltage 1 kQ minimum current 800 2 maximum e Output supplies power e Cannot use voltage and current output at the same time 13 volts 14 com 15 amps Figure 14c Output 2 Mechanical Relay PD__ _E e Form C contacts e 2A resistive e 125 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive e 240V ac maximum e 30V dc maximum e See Quencharc note e For use with ac or dc e Minimum load current 10 mA Mechanical Relay e Output does not supply power 16 normally closed 17 com a J m 18 normally open eee normally open 14 Chapte
46. Web Page Your Range Settings Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 units Configuration Multiple 0 to 99990 minutes PID Sets 1 Configuration Multiple 0 to 9990 minutes PID Sets 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 units Configuration Multiple 0 to 99990 minutes PID Sets 1 Configuration Multiple 0 to 9990 minutes PID Sets 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 degrees or units 1000 to 999000 degrees or 0 to 999000 degrees or units 1000 to 999000 degrees or 0 to 999000 degrees or units 30000000 to 30000000 Modbus Read write and scaling Default 25000 711 712 R W 1000 713 714 R W 1000 715 716 R W 1000 709 710 R W 1000 719 720 R W 1000 721 722 R W 1000 723 724 R W 1000 717 718 R W 1000 30000000 673 674 R W 1000 N Ol Watlow Series PD Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 gt PID Set 4 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 727 728 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units 0 to 99990 minutes 729 730 R W 1000
47. amp current transformer part number 16 0073 and an interstage transformer part number 16 0176 the 300 amp current transformer provides a 5 amp signal to the interstage transformer In turn the interstage transformer provides a 20 mA maximum signal to the con troller L2 Load wire B on 3 CT Input 2 1 CT Common Center leg not used L1 AC Load CT Input 2 CT Common 16 0176 Transformer Single phase current sensing up to 300 amp Figure 12b Current Transformer Input 2 Three Phase Phase dot L1 i oO 3 CT Input 2 a w 1 CT Common L3 L2 CT L1 To CT Input 2 Red To CT Common 20MA b Red i 16 0176 Wh Transformer L3 L2 3 phase current sensing up to 300 amp 12 Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Quencharc Note Switching pilot duty loads relay coils solenoids etc with the mechanical relay or solid state relay output options requires use of an R C suppressor Watlow carries the R C suppres sor Quencharc brand name which is a trademark of ITW Paktron Watlow Part No 0804 0147 0000 Note 24 V input power re quired to use sin
48. be displayed in the browser only CT Input 4 Low CT Scale Set unit value for low CT scale This setting is the displayed CT value when the analog input is at minimum CT Input 4 High CT Scale Set unit value for high CT scale This setting is the displayed CT value when the analog input is at maximum CT Input 4 Low Current Scale Set unit value for low end of current range This setting determines range of input CT Input 4 High Current Scale Set unit value for high end of current range This setting determines range of input CT Input 4 Output Source Select output CT source to monitor CT Input 4 Single Offset Val ue Set calibration single set point offset value This allows com pensation for lead resistance and sensor error Web Page Configuration CT Input 4 Configuration CT Input 4 Configuration CT Input 4 Configuration CT Input 4 Configuration CT Input 4 Configuration CT Input 4 Configuration CT Input 4 Configuration CT Input 4 Configuration CT Input 4 Your Range Settings None 0 CT Current 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 2 0 000 3 Up to four alpha numeric characters 30000000 to 30000000 units 30000000 to 30000000 units 0 to 50000 units 0 to 50000 units Output 1 0 Output 2 1 Output 3 2 Output 4 3 9999000 to 9999000 units Default Modbus Read write and scaling None 0 331 R W 0 0 1128 R o
49. cross line frequency detection fails Low Power Scale Set the minimum percent value for the output High Power Scale Set the maximum percent value for the output Analog Signal Select analog output type Low Voltage Scale Set the voltage value that corresponds to the Low Power Scale value High Voltage Scale Set the voltage value that corresponds to the High Power Scale value Low Current Scale Set the current value that corresponds to the Low Power Scale value High Current Scale Set the current value that corresponds to the High Power Scale value SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Off 0 Control 1 Event 2 Retransmit 3 Outputs 1 and 3 only Off 0 Heat Indirect 1 Cool Direct 2 Output 1 to 4 Configuration Output 1 to 4 Configuration Output 1 to 4 Configuration 1 to 600 10 0 1 to 60 seconds for non mechanical relay outputs Output 1 to 4 Configuration 1 0 to 60 seconds for mechanical relay outputs Output 1 to 4 Configuration Fixed 0 Variable 1 Output 1 to 4 Configuration Output 1 to 4 Configuration 0 to 10 000 1000 Output 1 to 4 Configuration 0 to 10 000 1000 Output 1 to 4 Configuration Output 1 to 4 Configuration 0 to 10 000 1000 Output 1 to 4 Configuration corey outy votaoe Ouburg _Votage O Output 1 to 4 Output 1 a 0 to 10 000 1000 10 000 Output 1 to 4 Output 1 Sane 0 to 20 000 1000
50. data types were named PD_O2T ControlLogix to PD and PD_T20 PD to ControlLogix In defining and then using these data types in the Program simple instructions i e COP can be used to transfer all assembly information between ControlLogix processor and the PD Because the data type PD Static_Assembly_Control2PD matches up byte for byte with the system generated tag Watlow_PD 0 and the fact that the copy COP instruction within the ControlLogix does a byte for byte transfer the programmer does not need to do any format conversions Figure 3 1d PDO_U2ZT PDO Static Assembly Controle Po PDO_O2T CL_Setpoint DIM T 2 PDO_O2T Manual SP IMT 22 PO_O2T CL_Ctrl_ Method IMT 2 PO_O2T Al_Failure4 ck INT PO_O2T ALM_Achons INT FPFO_T 20 PD Static Assembly PO2Cortral PO_T20 4 _A4ctivePY DIM T 4 PDO_T20 CL_ forkingSP DIM T 2 PO_T20 CL_ Power IN T 2 PO_T20 CL_ControlMode IMT 2 PDO_T20 DI0_ State INT PDO_T20 4LM_ Status INT PO_T20 Al_ErorStatus IN T 4 3 1 1 Implicit Ladder Logic Examples I O connections provide dedicated special purpose communication paths between a producing application and one or more consuming applications Application specific I O data moves through these ports and is often referred to as implicit messaging As this relates to the PD the Static Assembly see sections 2 2 1 and 2 2 3 above is used to send and receive this I O data In the event that the user would
51. devi ates from the controlled set point by the alarm deviation set point Alarm 1 Process Alarm Source Select input where this alarm gets the information for com parison to the alarm set point Alarm 1 Process Alarm Set Point Set the alarm process set point in absolute degrees or units Alarm 1 Deviation From Source Select control loop where this alarm gets the control set point for comparison to the alarm set point Alarm 1 Deviation Alarm Set Point Set the alarm deviation set point in degrees or units from Set point Select source of current trans former measurement to gener ate Alarm 1 Alarm 1 CT Alarm Set Point Enter current transformer set point for Alarm 1 to activate Your Settings Web Page Range Inactive 0 Active 1 Silenced 2 Monitor Device Trend Information Off 0 Low Process 1 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 1 High Process 2 Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 1 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 1 Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 1 Configuration Alarm 1 Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 1 degrees or units Off 0 Process Value 3 2 Process Value 4 3 Configuration Alarm 1 Configuration Alarm 1 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units 2000000200 to 2000000200 3000
52. for the logo appearing in the upper left corner of the banner at the top of each web page The logo files can be stored in the Storage Device 1 location of the Series PD or can be located at an external URL The logo must be a gif or jpg file Select the style sheet file css to be applied to the Series PD web pages Style sheets define fonts font sizes colors logo location and other web page attributes The style sheet files can be stored in the Storage Device 1 location of the Series PD or can be located at an external URL Enter up to 10 alphanumeric characters that appear in the center of the banner at the top of each Series PD web page For example 3 Zone 7 Click this button to refresh the logo and name appearing in the banner at the top of the Series PD web pages Click this button to refresh all of the Series PD web pages attrib utes 58 Chapter 7 Configuration Page i Calibration Page The Series PD Calibration web page provides access to calibrate any analog inputs or outputs installed It also allows restoring factory calibration values restoring control configuration defaults and saving or restoring user settings These are not typical operator functions and access to this page can be limited by going to Device Con figuration gt Network gt Security The Administration Security Level is the only level with access to the Calibra tion page Note You must enter the Administration Security Level user name and pa
53. loop Analog Input 3 Active Process Value Display analog input process value displayed on web page and used by control loop Analog Input 4 Active Process Value Display analog input process value displayed on web page and used by control loop Analog Input 1 Process Value Web Page Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Trend Information Your Settings Range 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units 2000000200 to 2000000200 units 2000000200 to 2000000200 units 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units 2000000200 to 2000000200 units 2000000200 to 2000000200 units 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units 2000000200 to 2000000200 units 2000000200 to 2000000200 units Modbus Read write and scaling Default 31 32 R 1000 43 44 R 1000 R R 33 34 R 1000 45 46 R 1000 R R 35 36 R 1000
54. o 30000000 336 337 R W 1000 30000000 338 339 R W 1000 332 333 R W 1000 20000 334 335 R W 1000 Output 2 1 1842 R W 340 341 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD 70 Cha pter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Inputs gt Digital Input 3 and 4 Parameter Name and Description Digital Input 3 Function Set function for digital input Digital Input 3 Active State Set level when digital input is active Digital Input 3 State Display state of digital input Digital Input 3 Acknowledge Alarm Action Specify action when Digital Input 3 is used to acknowl edge an alarm Select to use Digital Input 3 to acknowledge Alarm 1 Digital Input 3 Select Acknowledge Alarm 2 Select to use Digital Input 3 to acknowledge Alarm 2 Select to use Digital Input 3 to acknowledge Alarm 3 Digital Input 3 Select Acknowledge Alarm 4 Select to use Digital Input 3 to acknowledge Alarm 4 Digital Input 3 Select Acknowledge Alarm 5 Select to use Digital Input 3 to acknowledge Alarm 5 Configuration Digital Web Page Input 3 Configuration Digital Input 3 Configuration Digital Input 3 Configuration Digital Input 3 Configuration Digital Input 3 Configuration Digital Input 3 Configuration Digital Input 3 Configuration Digital Input 3 Configuration Digital Input 3 Your Settings Range Default Modbus
55. only e Input 2 isolated from Input 1 Figure 9c Voltage input 0 1V dc Event Input Low State 2 36V dc Event Input High State 3 Digitallnput2 c a Add a 1kQ pull u 2 igital Input 1 g ld down resistor for Digital Common 4 1kQ each active input Figure 9d Contact closure 0 2kQ Event Input Low State gt 7kQ Event Input High State 5V dc 4 i 10kQ 3 Digital Input 2 gt Aada 10KO pun oV Jl 4 up resistor for each 9 Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Note Current transformer CT must be purchased separately Note A current transformer input cannot be associated with a process output on Output 1 or 3 Figure 10a Digital input internal circuit 5V dc 4 o A k 5V dc Digital Input 2 3 Digital Input 1 2 Digital Input Common 1 e Input impedance 100Q Vac only The current transformer CT must be purchased separately Watlow CT part number is 16 0246 up to 50 amps Systems that are more than 50 amps need an interstage transformer For example if you use a 300 amp CT part number 16 0073 and an interstage transformer part number 16
56. systems The Series PD accepts thermocouple RTD and process signal control inputs and also features auxiliary digital inputs or optional current transformer CT inputs Up to four control or event alarm outputs can be selected on either the single or dual channel versions Advanced features of the Series PD controllers include internal datalogging of key control pa rameters INFOSENSE P sensor technology heater burn out detection and an enhanced control algorithm The SERIES PD controller is backed by a three year warranty from Watlow Winona and is UL 508 C UL CSA and CE approved Ethernet Communications A i V WATLOW PD PID Controller a Ethernet Link n 1 or 2 Universal Analog Inputs Single or dual channel E Ethernet Activity m 4 outputs can be configured as control or event alarm pia tad outputs Any output can be meut gt gt assigned to either channel 1 or 2 gt Output ap gt Event or Current Output 2 gt Transformer CT Inputs Output GY p gt ouput gt E gt Figure 2 Series PD inputs and outputs Watlow Series PD 2 Chapter 1 Overview Install and Wire Series PD Dimensions bracket for 4 i panel mounting pare M35 or 6 0 92 in screw required Top bottom Side View moam hole offset chi t aa pil 1 Power Ethernet Link 107 7 mm Ethernet Activity 4 24 in 95 3 mm 3 75 in 0 Input Error Input Error Output a O
57. to 30 000 000 1000 Depends on sensor type Loop 1 Loop 2 Maximum for 106 1 5 6A 1 5 sensor type 106 2 5 6A 2 5 On Off Hysteresis Heat Indirect Set the control switching hysteresis for on off heat indirect control This determines how far into the on region the input needs to move before the output turns on On Off Hysteresis Cool Direct Set the control switching hysteresis for on off cool direct control This determines how far into the Loop 1 3 000 106 1 9 6A 1 9 Loop 2 i 106 2 9 6A 2 9 Loop 1 3 000 106 1 10 6A 1 A on region the input needs to move before the Loop 2 106 2 10 6A 2 A output turns on Start Autotune Control Loop 1 or 2 Loop 1 101 1 36 65 1 24 Activates autotuning of the PID values Configuration a ji Loop 2 101 1 44 65 1 2C Autotune Set Point Control Loop 1 or 2 Loop 1 106 1 11 6A 1 B 666 oe 50 to 150 Set Autotune set point in percent Configuration Loop 2 106 2 11 6A 2 B PID Sets Control Loop 1 or 2 Single 0 Loop 1 106 1 12 6A 1 C pita to use single or multiple PID sets for the Configuration ane Loop 2 Single 0 106 2 12 6A 2 C Control Loop 1 or 2 Configuration 1 000 to 99 000 1000 Control Loop 1 or 2 Configuration 1 000 to 99 000 1000 DINT R W UINT UINT SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 174 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default ___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type
58. to 9999000 degrees or units Minute 0 Hour 1 Default Modbus Read write and scaling Off 0 658 R W 661 R W 100 654 655 R W 1000 656 657 R W 1000 662 663 R W 1000 664 665 R W 1000 759 760 R W 1000 Single 0 100000 Watlow Series PD N Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 gt PID Set 1 Parameter Name and Description Loop 1 PID Crossover Source Specify to switch PID sets based on a set point or a process value Loop 1 PID Set 1 Indirect Prop Band Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units Loop 1 PID Set 1 Indirect Integral Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat Loop 1 PID Set 1 Indirect Derivative Set the heat indirect derivative time in minutes Loop 1 PID Set 1 Indirect Dead Band Set the offset of the heat indirect proportional band from set point in process units Loop 1 PID Set 1 Direct Prop Band Set the cool direct propor tional band from set point in process units Loop 1 PID Set 1 Direct Integral Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat Loop 1 PID Set 1 Direct Derivative Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes Loop 1 PID Set 1 Direct Dead Band Set the offset of the cool direct proportional band from set point in process units Loo
59. to clear a latched alarm Bits 1 through 8 correspond to alarms 1 to 8 Monitor Device 32 768 to 32 767 Alarm Status Read the corresponding bit to determine the alarm status 0 inactive 1 active Bits 1 to 8 correspond to alarms 1 to 8 Analog Input Failure Latching Acknowledge Set the corresponding bit to acknowledge the input error 1 acknowledge Bit 1 corresponds to analog input 1 and bit 2 corresponds to analog input 2 Monitor Device 32 768 to 32 767 Monitor Device 32 768 to 32 767 1000 Analog 1 Indicates the unfiltered process value measured b Monitor Device SU OOO CUD 10 90000090 ANA Og NpU 1000 Analog Input 2 the corresponding analog input CT Input 3 CT Input 4 CT Input 3 CT Input 4 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 Inactive or Off 0 101 1 47 65 1 2F 101 1 53 65 1 35 101 1 59 65 1 3B 101 1 65 65 1 41 101 1 71 65 1 47 101 1 77 65 1 4D 101 1 83 65 1 53 101 1 89 65 1 59 101 1 52 65 1 34 101 1 58 65 1 3A 101 1 64 65 1 40 101 1 70 65 1 46 101 1 76 65 1 4C 101 1 82 65 1 52 101 1 88 65 1 58 101 1 94 65 1 5E 101 1 51 65 1 33 101 1 57 65 1 39 101 1 63 65 1 3F 101 1 69 65 1 45 101 1 75 65 1 4B 101 1 81 65 1 51 101 1 87 65
60. transferred Delete All Datalog Files No 0 Select to clear the current datalog file Palaleg Datalog Configuration Yes 107 11 21 68 1 15 6B 1 15 121 oo aao O UN TFTP Transfer Interval Specify the time interval of data transfers to the Datalog Configuration 1 to 999 Web page only Web page only TFTP server Device Configuration gt Datalogging gt Clock Current Time Hours Specify the minutes portion of the time Specify the seconds portion of time Current Time 12 Hour Meridien A M Time Zone Up to four alpha Current Date Month Current Date Day l current Date veal Clock Clock Configuration 2000 to 2099 2008 108 1 55 108 1 55 6C 1 37 m Specify the year portion of the date Synchronize Clock With Time Server Enable the real time clock to automatically Clock Configuration Web page only Web page only synchronize with a time server Time Server IP Resolution DHCP Specify the method for assigning the clock server Clock Configuration Server Name DHCP Web page only Web page only R W IP address Fixed Address SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 182 Name and Description Range Scaling Default _ _EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type _ Access Iterations Time Server Name Time Server Fixed Address 2 147 483 647 to Specify a fixed IP address for the time server cece Comiauranion 2 147 483 647 ae E PATEAR bad a oe Device Information a 5
61. try to verify the reason for the return 4 In cases of manufacturing defect we will enter a repair order replacement order or issue credit for material returned 5 To return products that are not defective goods must be be in new condition in the orig inal boxes and they must be returned within 120 days of receipt A 20 percent restocking charge is applied for all returned stock controls and accessories 6 Ifthe unit is unrepairable it will be returned to you with a letter of explanation 7 Watlow reserves the right to charge for no trouble found NTF returns The Series PD User s Manual is copyrighted by Watlow Winona Inc November 2003 with all rights reserved 2413 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview 02002 cence eee 2 Chapter 2 Install and Wire 3 DIMENSIONS 2 2 5 s d e o40hed odd ae 6 2d de ade 3 Mounting Removal ecg dw aod wade he awe aie aoa are 4 CONMMCCIONS gar vsaes acre aoeeeen dees Gee ora 5 VINO tenant eee iaa iE be uke or ERRE nes Eae 6 Chapter 3 Indicator Lights 19 Chapter 4 Ethernet Communications 20 Chapter 5 Monitor Device Page 22 Navigation Frame cee 23 Chapter 6 Device Information Page 25 Chapter 7 Device Configuration Page 28 Laa ies lt 2g 8444 5 44 00 54 aureno eoeee Ge Ges Hea 29 Control LOOpS 2 529 4082 doc daeee ee he eeu lt e es 35 OUUOUIS saocrad hakr odes p
62. using a straight wired RJ45 Category 5 cable The Series PD is limited to a 1OBaseT connection and will not work on an Ethernet port set for 100BaseT only Use of a 10 100 switch hub will overcome this issue if your PC has only a 100BaseT port 2 Wire a 24VX amp ac dc power supply to the Series PD power terminals See wiring section 3 Wire sensor inputs and controller outputs See wiring section 4 Power up the controller switch hub and PC 5 Start your Internet browser Enter the Browse at address of the Series PD into the browser s address field See figure on next page for the Browse at address location on the left side label Two different Netbios names may be used to access the Series PD Either PDxxxxxx where xxxxxx is the first six digits of the serial number located on the left side label or WATxxxxxx where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the Series PD MAC address The MAC address is also printed on the left side label of the Se ries PD in the form xx xx xx xx See figure on next page Note Browsing the Series PD using the Netbios name only works with Windows The computer and Series PD must be on the same logical network Browsing using the IP address always works Note If you are not using a DHCP server it may take several minutes for both the Series PD and your computer to get their IP addresses Watlow Series PD 20 Chapter 4 Ethernet Communications Serial number sh 012345 OC YYW Auxiliary Inputs Type PD01
63. view or change Alarm Blocking go to Device Configuration gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Gen eral Alarm Settings gt Blocking To enable blocking select On and click the Submit button to send the new value Alarm High Set Point Hysteresis Process Temperature Normal Operating Range Alarm enabled here Temperature Hysteresis Alarm Oo Low triggered Set Point here Startup Alarm disabled Time Alarm Silencing Alarm sliencing allows the operator to disable the alarm output while the controller is in an alarm state The process temperature has to enter the normal oper ating range beyond the hysteresis zone to activate the alarm output function When an alarm that has silencing enabled trips go to Monitor Device gt Alarm Status gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Silencing Click the Silence link to si lence that alarm Network Email Electronic Notification The Email Electronic Notification configuration al lows the Series PD control to send emails or pages via Ethernet to 4 recipients for e Alarms that are configured to send the email e Notification of datalog file problems if enabled The configuration requires the name or IP address of your local SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server Your local network support group will be able to supply you with this information SMTP Server IP Resolution Get Server IP from Server Name Using the Server name entered in the SMTP S
64. want to read or write to different attributes the Dynamic Assembly is provided to allow the user to increase the assembly size including those attributes of their choice To better understand the ladder logic example below some of the tags used are defined below Figure 3 1 1a New CL Setpomt_Loopl 2 DIA T 2 Hew CL Setpoint Loopl 0 DINT Hew CL Setpoint Loopl_ 1 DINT New Ctrl Method Loopl 2 IT 2 New Chl Method Loop 0 INT Hew Ctrl Method Loopl_2 7 IMT New OL Setpoint IH T 2 Hew OL Setpoint 0 IMT Hew OL_Setpoint 1 IMT 161 Below the first rung of logic simply takes the new values entered into the tags above and copies them to the appropriate tags in the array defined as PD_O2T As can be seen in figure 3 1 1a the source tags were formatted to correspond with the format of the destination tags in the copy instructions Figure 3 7 1b Closed Loop Setpoint Loop 1d amp 2 Load Mew Assembly alues OFP Copy File Source Mew CL Setpoint_Lloopl_ 2 0 Dest PO _O2T ZL_Setpoint 0 Length Open Loop Setpoint Loop 1 amp 2 Topy File Source MWewr_OL_Setpoint 0 Dest PO_O2T Manual _SP O Length Ato Manual Off Loop 1 amp 2 Copy File Source Mews Ctrl Method Loop _ 0 Dest PO OST scl Ctrl _Methodi0 Length Yerite new values to Static Assembly Verte Wew Assembly OST mip Copy File SOUrce PO m2T Dest Wwatow POoO Data O Length 10 Once the conta
65. 0 Mbps Ethernet Port on CompactLogm5s32 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on CompactLogm5s35E 1788 Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device 1788 107 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media 1788 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w Enhanced Web Services 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Drivelogiy 30 Ethernet 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on OnveLogm5 30 Etheret IP SoftLogis5800 EtheretlP ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module ETHERMET PANELYIES Ethernet lP Panelyiew PowerFlex 700 Yector 2l PowerFles 00 Vector Drive 208 240 via 20 COMM E PowerFles 00 Yector dl PowerFlex 00 Vector Drive 400 4804 via 20 COMM E Show Vendar All 1769 L32E Ethernet Port 1769 L35E Ethernet Port W Other i Specialty 1 0 W Communication i Motion W Controller W Analog Digital 2 Select the Generic Ethernet Module and click OK 2 2 Configuring PD Properties using RSLogix 5000 Select All Clear All Fe Cancel Help gt After clicking OK above the following screen will appear Completion of all fields in this screen the description field is an exception is mandatory Figure 2 2 Module Properties ENBT_A ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 Type Vendor Allen Bradley Parent EMBT 4 Name Description Comm Format Data INT Address Host Mame P Address C Host Name Tooo ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Connection Parameters Assembly Instance SIZE Inpu
66. 0 Q mini mum load resistance 0 to 20 mA current output into 800 Q maximum load resistance Resolution dc ranges 2 5 mV nominal mA ranges 5 pA nominal Calibration accuracy dc ranges 15 mV mA ranges 30 uA Temperature stability 100 ppm C Watlow Series PD 147 Communications Ethernet Modbus TCP or web server Isolated Ethernet RJ 45 connector 10 base T HTTP interface DHCP Auto IP or fixed IP addressing Agency Approvals e UL 508 File 102269 C UL and CE See Declara tion of Conformity UL is a registered trademark of the Underwriter s Laboratories Inc Submitted to Canadian Standards Association for testing Terminals e Touch safe Compression Will accept 0 2 to 4 mm 22 to 12 AWG wire Wire strip length 6 mm 0 24 in Torque terminal blocks to 0 9 Nm 8 in lb Power e 24V ac dc 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Class 2 power source required 14VA maximum power consumption Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory Operating Environment e 0 to 65 C 32 to 149 F 0 to 90 RH non condensing Storage temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Dimensions e Width x height x depth 42 mm x 118 mm x 128 mm 1 64 in x 4 66 in x 5 06 in DIN rail or chassis mount DIN rail spec DIN 50022 35 mm x 7 5 mm 1 38 in x 0 30 in Note These specifications are subject to change without prior notice Appendix Ordering Information A
67. 0 to 30 000 000 CT Input 3 30 000 000 102 3 9 66 3 9 Configuration 1000 CT Input 4 102 4 9 66 4 9 as determined by the High Current Scale Low Current Scale Set the input process current in milliamps that wil correspond to the Low CT Scale High Current Scale Set the input process current in milliamps that wil correspond to the High CT Scale Output Select output to monitor with the CT input CT Input 3 or 4 Configuration CT Input 3 or 4 Configuration CT Input 3 102 3 5 66 3 5 0 to 50 000 1000 CT Input 4 0 090 102 4 5 66 4 5 Output 1 Output A ae A 9 999 000 to 9 999 000 CT Input 3 1000 CT Input 4 Addressing Information rev c CT Input 3 or 4 CT Input 3 CT Input 4 camura 102 3 13 66 3 D Configuration 102 4 13 66 4 D Single Offset Value Set a value to compensate for the input s lead resistance and signal inaccuracy CT Input 3 or 4 Configuration 102 3 10 66 3 A 102 4 10 66 4 A SERIES PD with EtherNet IP 108 1 42 6C 1 2A 108 1 46 6C 1 2E EIP Decimal Hex Modbus _ EIP Data Type Access 256 257 286 287 ey aw 1109 1107 66 1 B 268 102 2 11 66 2 B 298 Sunny 102 1 12 66 1 C 102 2 12 66 2 C ey ee 102 1 10 66 1 A 266 267 NT 102 2 10 66 2 A 296 297 311 331 UINT 1124 Up to four alohanumeric CT Input 3 108 1 44 6C 1 2C 1125 1126 CT Input 4 108 1 48 6C 1 30 1129 1130 SHORT_STRING 316 317 336 337
68. 00 Set the value that will trigger this alarm Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 1 to 8 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Alarm 4 Configuration 1000 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Send Email Select to enable an email to be sent on activation of alarm 1 Email Subject Enter a subject for the alarm email Alarm 1 to 8 Configuration Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Web page only B ai Alarm 3 Alarm 1 to 8 Alarm 4 Configuration PO GAARNE Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm 1 Set how far the process value must return into the Alarm 2 normal operating range for an alarm to clear Alarm 3 Alarm 1 to 8 Alarm 4 Configuration A no Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Latching Alarm 1 Select whether this alarm will be latched which Alarm 2 requires that it be cleared manually after the Alarm 3 process value returns to the normal range Alarm 1 to 8 Alarm 4 Configuration Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 _ B ai 105 1 8 69 1 8 539 540 105 2 8 69 2 8 553 554 105 3 8 69 3 8 567 568 105 4 8 69 4 8 581 582 105 5 8 69 5 8 595 596 Bus nae 105 6 8 69 6 8 609 610 105 7 8 69 7 8 623 624 637 638 105 1 7 69 1 7 UINT R W 105 2 7 69 2 7 Addressing Information rev c 180 3 000 105 3 7 69 3 7 105 4 7 69 4 7 mono 105 5 7 69 5 7 105 6 7 69 6 7 105 7 7 69 7 7 SERIES PD with EtherNet IP
69. 0000 MSW 1250000 216 19 LSW 1250000 19 2416 4816 Scaling Factor Multiplier or divisor for the parameter value Decimal Precision Decimal precision is implied at three decimal places for integer values unless otherwise noted All values used by the Series PD are integer values Go to http www modbus org for detailed information on the Modbus TCP protocol Watlow Series PD 62 Chapter 9 Device Config Tables Device Configuration gt Inputs gt Analog Inputs 1 and 2 CT Inputs 3 and 4 Parameter Name and Description Display analog input unfil tered process value Analog Input 2 Process Value Display analog input unfil tered process value Analog Input 3 Process Value Display analog input unfil tered process value Analog Input 4 Process Value Display analog input unfil tered process value Analog Input 1 Filtered Process Value Display analog input filtered process value Analog Input 2 Filtered Process Value Display analog input filtered process value Analog Input 3 Filtered Process Value Display analog input filtered process value Analog Input 4 Filtered Process Value Display analog input filtered process value Analog Input 1 Active Process Value Display analog input process value displayed on web page and used by control loop Analog Input 2 Active Process Value Display analog input process value displayed on web page and used by control
70. 0000 to 30000000 units 108 109 R W 1000 _ SS Default Modbus Read write and scaling Inactive 0 103 R 106 107 R W 1000 533 R W 1 104 105 R W 1000 534 R W Watlow Series PD 100 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Alarm 1 Send Email Enable Select to enable an email to be sent upon activation of Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Email Alert Subject Enter subject of email for Alarm 1 This message will appear in the subject line of the sent email Alarm 1 Alarm Hysteresis Select hysteresis value Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can clear Alarm 1 Latching Enable Select to enable alarm to be latched Latched alarms must be manually cleared when the process returns to a safe value Alarm 1 Latching Action Select to cause an active alarm to clear if latching is enabled and the process returns to a safe value Alarm 1 Silencing Enable Select to enable alarm silenc ing Silencing allows the oper ator to disable alarm while the controller is in an alarm state Alarm 1 Silence Action Select to cause an active alarm to silence if silencing is enabled Alarm 1 Blocking Select to prevent a low alarm from triggering when the process temperature is initial ly lower than the alarm set point due to power on or set point change Also applies t
71. 0176 the 300 amp CT provides a 5 amp signal to the interstage transformer In turn the interstage transformer provides a 20 mA maximum signal to the controller Figure 10b Single Phase DN R o 3 CT Input 2 an 2 CT Input 1 1 CT Common g I aM To CT Input 1 or 2 To CT Common T Center leg not used AC Load CT Input 1 or 2 Oto 20mA CT Common i 16 0176 Transformer Single phase current sensing up to 300 amp Watlow Series PD 10 Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Note Current transformer CT must be purchased separately Note A current transformer input cannot be associated with a process output on Output 1 or 3 Note Install a 1kQ pull down resistor for each digital in put using voltage inputs Note Install a 10kQ pull up re sistor for each digital input using contact closure in puts Watlow Series PD Figure 11a Three Phase using Two Current Transformers Phase E dot on 3 CT Input 2 L1 aL 2 GT Input 1 To CT Input 1 or 2 a 1 CT Common To CT Common L3 L2 CT L1 To CT Input 1 or 2 Red To CT Common Ameja Red 16 0176 Wh L3 T
72. 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 o Off 0 Set Point Change 1 Power On 2 Set Point Change and Power On 3 Watlow Series PD 103 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 3 Parameter Name and Description Alarm 8 Status Display status of Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Type Select alarm type A process alarm responds when the tem perature crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the temperature devi ates from the controlled set point by the alarm deviation set point Alarm 3 Process Alarm Source Select input where this alarm gets the information for com parison to the alarm set point Alarm 3 Process Alarm Set Point Set the alarm process set point in absolute degrees or units Alarm 3 Deviation From Source Select control loop where this alarm gets the control set point for comparison to the alarm set point Alarm 3 Deviation Alarm Set Point Set the alarm deviation set point in degrees or units from set point Alarm 3 CT Measurement Source Select source of current trans former measurement to gener ate Alarm 3 Alarm 3 CT Alarm Set Point Enter current transformer set point for Alarm 8 to activate Your Settings Web Page Range Inactive 0 Active 1 Silenced 2 Monitor Device Trend Information Off 0 Low Process 1 High Process 2 Monitor Device
73. 1 521 522 g m ow eine Sar ine as 414 415 484 485 DINT R W UINT R W INT R W a 50 Hz 0 80 Hz 1 Yo 60 Hz 1 108 1 31 6C 1 1F 1075 UINT D B UINT 177 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default ___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type Access Retransmit Source Process Value 1 0 Select the source the output will restransmit Output 1 to 4 Process Value 2 2 Output 1 Process Value 1 104 1 26 68 1 1A 422 UINT R W Configuration Set Point 1 1 Output 3 0 104 3 26 68 3 1A 492 Set Point 2 3 Retransmit Low Scale een aera the retransmit signal Retransmit High Scale Output 1 to 4 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Output 1 104 1 28 68 1 1C 425 426 Set the value that corresponds to the high value of 1000 30 000 000 104 3 28 68 3 1C 495 496 DINT R W the retransmit signal R W Retransmit Offset Output 1 to 4 9 999 000 to 9 999 000 o ae 104 1 29 68 1 1D 427 428 DINT Set the offset value for the retransmit signal Configuration 1000 Output 3 104 3 29 68 3 1D 497 498 Output Source Alarm 1 Output 1 104 1 8 68 1 8 400 Enable Alarm 1 to trigger the output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 8 68 2 8 440 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 8 68 3 8 470 Output 4 510 Output Source Alarm 2 Output 1 104 1 9 68 1 9 401 Enable Alarm 2 to trigger the output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 9 68 2 9 441 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1
74. 1 57 101 1 93 65 1 5D Z xe n No a a a a o a ee ee a ee SI ae eee eee 101 1 2 65 1 2 101 1 7 65 1 7 101 1 1 65 1 1 101 1 6 65 1 6 Web page only Web page only Web page only Web page only 101 1 100 65 1 64 101 1 98 65 1 62 101 1 99 65 1 63 E E ee UINT R W 162 175 188 201 33 34 45 46 DINI 31 32 Pr DINT WORD R W a Di a a n asc aoooow 10000 von kapo 0 nees PT SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 170 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type Access Digital I O State Read and set the states of the digital I O 0 off and 1 on Bits 0 and 1 correspond to digital f inputs 1 and 2 Bits 8 9 10 and 11 correspond to Monitor Device 32 768 to 32 767 101 1 95 65 1 5F WORD digital outputs 1 2 3 and 4 All other bits reserved Device Configuration gt Inputs gt Analog Input 1 or 2 a e E T e S ie Sensor Type None 0 Set the sensor type Thermocouple 1 Analog Input 1 or 2 RTD 2 Analog Input 1 102 1 1 66 1 1 251 Configuration Voltage Process 3 Analog Input 2 mone 101 1 5 65 2 1 281 mann me Current Process 4 INFOSENSE PnP 5 Thermocouple Parameters Set the thermocouple type Analog Input 1 or 2 Analog Input 1 102 1 2 66 1 2 252 Configuration Analog Input 2 J 0 102 2 2 66 2 2 282 UINT R W B 10 Set the RTD linearization Configuration AAN S
75. 14px Times background color FFFFCC color 004488 submenu display none margin left 5px padding 1px line height 100 font 16px Times background color FFFFCC color 004488 Chapter 10 Features font style oblique body margin 0 font family Times b font weight bold p font 11px 18px Times margin top 5px Banner Caption Allows customization of the banner line 10 charac ters maximum for all HTML pages The banner can provide a more intuitive identity for the control such as Chamber 1 Trend Information The Trend Information page displays the Logging Data that is contained in Storage Device 0 on the File System page Each file in Storage Device 0 can be read in and the data displayed to for the inputs set points and loop power Scaling shown on the left side of the display graph for the inputs and set points used will be limited to the maximum value read from any of the log files Loop power scaling is fixed at 100 to 100 as indicated along the right side of the display graph Communications 1 Choose a device to communicate with the con troller The controller can communicate with devices such as a computer running a software program a PLC Pro erammable Logic Controller or an OIT Operator Inter face Terminal Whichever device is chosen it needs to be able to communicate using the Modbus TCP Protocol 2 Select a software package for the computer
76. 2 1 6A 2 1 771 Rane ete enue direct control Control Loop 1 or 2 a Loop 1 T 106 1 2 6A 1 2 652 UNN PEPENE OOM IOS eur COD OMEGN CONTON Configuration PID Loop 2 106 2 2 6A 2 2 112 Aa ff 0 Failure Latching Control Loop 1 or 2 i Loop 1 O 106 1 7 6A 1 7 660 UINT l l i l Configuration Loop 2 106 2 7 6A 2 7 780 when the input signal is valid again Select whether input errors clear automatically SHEL transition Mom AUR MOCE Control Loop 1 or 2 aA 5 Loop 1 106 1 6 6A 1 6 658 Select how the output will respond to an input Conficuraion Fixed Power 1 Gen 106 2 6 6A 2 6 778 UNIT failure g Bumpless Power 2 p Failure Fixed Power Set the output power level that will take effect if Control Loop 1 or 2 Output Transition from Auto to Manual is set to Configuration Fixed Power and there is an input failure Set Point Limit Low Set the minimum auto closed loop set point Control Loop 1 or 2 allowed Configuration Loop 1 Loop 2 106 1 8 6A 1 8 10 000 to 10 000 100 106 2 8 6A 2 8 O gt e SIO y O D 661 654 655 774 775 DINT R W 656 657 776 777 DINT R W 662 663 782 783 DINT R W 664 665 784 785 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 1000 Depends on sensor type Loop 1 Loop 2 Minimum for 106 1 4 6A 1 4 sensor type 106 2 4 6A 2 4 Set Point Limit High Set the maximum auto closed loop set point Control Loop 1 or 2 allowed Configuration 30 000 000
77. 2 2 105 3 2 69 3 2 105 4 2 69 4 2 105 5 2 69 5 2 105 6 2 69 6 2 105 7 2 69 7 2 101 1 49 65 1 31 101 1 55 65 1 37 101 1 61 65 1 3D 101 1 67 65 1 43 101 1 73 65 1 49 101 1 79 65 1 4F 101 1 85 65 1 55 105 1 3 69 1 3 105 2 3 69 2 3 105 3 3 69 3 3 105 4 3 69 4 3 105 5 3 69 5 3 105 6 3 69 6 3 105 7 3 69 7 3 101 1 48 65 1 30 101 1 54 65 1 36 101 1 60 65 1 3C 101 1 66 65 1 42 101 1 72 65 1 48 101 1 78 65 1 4E 101 1 84 65 1 54 399 439 469 509 408 448 478 518 397 437 467 507 106 107 119 120 132 133 145 146 158 159 171 172 184 185 197 198 104 105 117 118 130 131 143 144 156 157 169 170 182 183 195 196 UINT R W UINT R W UINT UINT R W UNIT R W DINT R W UINT R W DINT R W 179 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default ___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type Access Current Transformer Measurement Input Alarm 1 105 1 4 69 1 4 Select which current transformer input value this Alarm 2 alarm will monitor Alarm 3 Alarm 1 to 8 One Alarm 4 l f CT Input 3 2 CT Input 4 3 UINT R W Configuration Alarm 5 CT Input 4 3 Aat Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Current Transformer Alarm Set Point Alarm 1 101 1 50 65 1 32 108 109 101 1 56 65 1 38 121 122 101 1 62 65 1 3E 134 135 101 1 68 65 1 44 147 148 101 1 74 65 1 4A 160 161 eet on 101 1 80 65 1 50 173 174 101 1 86 65 1 56 186 187 101 1 92 65 1 5C 199 2
78. 2003 Trend Information Aate Device Identification Device Infornation Hame Po000367 i E EDevi e Configuration Current Scttin ae deed IP Address 10 3381 2 af i rr EF PLIE ao i HOi ukse H k 255 255 Zen a SSS 3 E Naor Li WS a ETY Fr 1i 4 44 24 Li i auasssssssssssssssssssstll 5 TMP Sather er IP Address Resolution Method E Danh n Choose the method for this hosts IP address magmen Bek Sorter Try DHCP server then use Auto IP then we bed sider oe Caitrato C Try DHCP server then ure Gred IP addrers is 7 C Tre Auto TP then ae Greed IP adders i Fined IF Address m KE i a npg j 3 Bari Viewed In JE HH 10 oe ed TF Ae 192 168 0 1 10 Mozik 1 012 Fixed Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 gt lt lt Pred Gateway faz TBE T 1 2 2 SS 1 A Emed OWS rer faz IES C 1 Aa 1 q Figure 45 Network Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 45 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Network Configuration Parameters Device Identification 1 Name Current Settings 2 IP Address 3 Subnet Mask 4 Default Gateway 5 DNS Server IP Address Resolution Method 6 Try DHCP AutolP then Fixed IP 7 Try DHCP then Fixed IP 8 Try AutolIP then Fixed IP Fixed IP Fixed IP Address 10 Fixed IP
79. 2147483647 18 R 20 R 9 R 0 to 2000000200 7 8 R 32000 to 167000 degrees 32000 1015 1016 R 1000 32000 to 167000 degrees 32000 1019 1020 R 1000 Watlow Series PD 123 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Hardware Analog Input 1 Counts Display the A D counts Hardware Analog Input 2 Counts Display the A D counts Hardware Analog Input 3 Counts Display the A D counts Hardware Analog Input 4 Counts Display the A D counts Hardware Analog Out 1 Process Value Indicates the process output value for Output 1 Hardware Analog Out 3 Process Value Indicates the process output value for Output 3 Web Page Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Your Settings Range 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 2000000200 to 2000000200 units 2000000200 to 2000000200 units Default Modbus Read write and scaling 1003 1004 R 1001 1002 R 1005 1006 R 1007 1008 R 1023 1024 R 1000 1027 1028 R 1000 Watlow Series PD 124 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Hardware Net Fixed IP Identifies the Fixed IP address to use if selected Hardware Net Fixed Subnet Identifies the Fixed Subnet mask to use if selected
80. 2345 i 3 4 Input 2 11 l 82 12 V Info Data w wg Xi Eua f onneci tivity solutions rowse at http PD012345 MAC Address Type WAT456789 Browse at address Type PD012345 ess 00 01 23 45 67 89 MAC Addr WATLOW Made In USA Figure 21 Browse at address MAC address and Serial number locations 6 When you change data on the Monitor Device page or access other web pages you are prompted to en ter a Network Security user name and password The factory defaults are user name new password user 7 Once you enter the user name and password you can access the other controller pages If you browse another address or close your browser you will be required to enter this information again 8 To change security level passwords go to Device Configuration gt Network gt Security 9 To configure the Series PD go to Device Configuration and set up the unit Note The controller leaves the factory with all inputs outputs and control loops set to off Go through each Device Configuration page and make the appropriate selections for your application Click the Submit button at the bottom of each page Note Be sure to click the Submit button at the bottom of any Device Configuration screen to send your changes to the controller Changes are not entered into the controller until you submit them 9 Select the Monitor Device page The process values and set points are displayed You can change con troll
81. 3 to trigger this output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 16 68 2 10 453 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 16 68 3 10 499 Output 4 523 Output Source Digital Input 4 Output 1 104 1 17 68 1 11 430 Enable Digital Input 4 to trigger this output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 17 68 2 11 454 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 17 68 3 11 500 Output 4 104 4 17 68 4 11 524 SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 178 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default ___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type Access 104 1 7 68 1 7 Output Logic Operator Select the logic operation to determine the event output status Output 1 to 4 Configuration Output Active State Select the output state when an alarm condition is Output 1 to 4 true Configuration Output State Indicates the state of the output Alarm Type Select the type of alarm A process alarm responds when the temperature crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the termperature deviates from the controlled setpoint by the Alarm Deviation Set Point Alarm 1 to 8 Configuration Process Alarm Source Select which process value the alarm will monitor Alarm 1 to 8 Configuration Process Alarm Set Point Set the temperature or process value that will trigger the alarm Alarm 1 to 8 Configuration Deviation From Loop Select which set point the alarm will m
82. 49 850 R W 1000 851 852 R W 1000 845 846 R W 1000 855 856 R W 1000 857 858 R W 1000 859 860 R W 1000 853 854 R W 1000 30000000 795 796 R W 1000 N N Ol Ol Watlow Series PD Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 2 gt PID Set 5 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 863 864 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 5 Indirect Configuration Multiple 0 to 99990 minutes Integral PID Sets 2 Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat 865 866 R W 1000 0 to 9990 minutes 867 868 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 5 Indirect Configuration Multiple Derivative PID Sets 2 Set the heat indirect deriva tive time in minutes Loop 2 PID Set 5 Indirect Configuration Multiple Dead Band PID Sets 2 Set the offset of the heat indi rect proportional band from set point in process units 0 to 999000 degrees or units 861 862 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 5 Direct Configuration Multiple Prop Band PID Sets 2 Set the cool direct propor tional band from set point in process units 1000 to 999000 degrees or units
83. 5 S eee ee een a resent for the Device Information one to Analog Input 1 whiversal 1 LOSI LF OCH 1e UINT PAARE i P Universal 1 Analog Input 2 None 0 108 1 18 6C 1 12 1044 corresponding analog input Digital Input 3 or 4 Type ah None 0 Digital Input 3 108 1 21 6C 1 15 1047 Displays the type Or hardware present for the Device Information Dry Contact 1 Digital Input 4 None 0 108 1 22 6C 1 16 1048 UINT corresponding digital input ea ae A eee Device Information monex0 ae None 0 E on UINT ea E p Current Transformer 2 CT Input 4 108 1 20 6C 1 14 1046 corresponding analog input Display the measured line frequency Part Number MAC Address STRUCT of Indicates the controller s serial number Date Code 2 147 483 647 to Indicates the controller s date of manufacture 2 147 483 647 Le 7 ee a DINT Ea Indicates the firmware prototype version Serial e Released REVISION 0 to 32 767 3 100 1 9 64 1 9 11 INT Indicates the software revision Hardware Net IP Resolution DHCP auto IP fixed IP Specify the order of methods to try to set the the 0 controller s IP address Configuration Network DHCP fixed IP 1 Auto IP fixed IP 2 Number of Analog Inputs Implemented Displays the number of analog inputs Device Information 1to4 100 1 14 64 1 E implemented m DHCP auto IP fixed IP 0 ne Web page only Web page only 100 1 15 Number of Digital Inputs Implemented Displa
84. 871 872 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 5 Direct Configuration Multiple 0 to 99990 minutes Integral PID Sets 2 Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat 873 874 R W 1000 0 to 9990 minutes Loop 2 PID Set 5 Direct Configuration Multiple Derivative PID Sets 2 Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes 875 876 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 5 Direct Configuration Multiple Dead Band PID Sets 2 Set the offset of the cool direct proportional band from set point in process units 0 to 999000 degrees or units 869 870 R W 1000 N N Ol Ol Watlow Series PD 89 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Outputs gt Output 1 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Gee and scaun Output System Power Line Configuration Outputs Frequency Select the frequency of the line voltage 50 Hz 0 60 Hz 1 1075 R W 60 Hz 1 Off 0 Off 0 391 R W Control 1 Event 2 Retransmit 3 Off 0 Off 0 398 R W Heat Indirect 1 Cool Direct 2 Loop 1 0 Loop 1 0 393 R W Loop 2 1 0 1 to 60 seconds for non 1 0 second for 1392 R W 10 mechanical relay outputs non mech 396 R W Output 1 Function Configuration Output 1 Select the function of the out put Output 1 Output Direction Configuration Output 1 Select whether the output will be for hea
85. 9 1190 R W 1000 Datalog Logging Interval Configuration Data Specify the timed intervals of logging Settings datalog updates Datalog Logging Interval Configuration Data Units logging Settings Specify the units for the data logging interval Minutes Watlow Series PD 118 Chapter 9 Device Config Table No 0 Yes 1 Datalog Datalog File Configuration Data Compression logging Settings Select to enable datalog file compression Datalog TFTP Transfer Inter Configuration Data 1 to 999 seconds or minutes val logging Settings Specify the time intervals of data transfers to the TFTP server Overwrite starting at first file Stop Logging Datalog When Log File is Full Configuration Data Action logging Settings Specify the action to be taken when the datalog file is full No Yes Datalog Write Log File to Configuration Data TFTP Server logging Settings Enable datalog files to go to TFTP server when files are full Datalog TFTP Server Name Configuration Data Enter the TFTP Server Name logging Settings where datalog files will be transferred Z Z Z ee Z lt T p oO N 2 5 Se n n ja ct Nl Oo Or Datalog TFTP Server IP Configuration Data 2147483647 to 2147483647 Enter the TFTP Server IP ad logging Settings dress where datalog files will be transferred No 0 Yes 1 Datalog Delete All Datalog Configu
86. 9 to 9999r Type R Oto 1 450 C or 32 to 2 642 F i Type S O to 1 450 C or 32 to 2 642 F Type B 870 to 1 700 C or 1 598 to 3 092 F RTD DIN 200 to 800 C or 328 to 1 472 F Process 1 999 to 9 999 un Watlow Series PD 146 Appendix Output Types Open Collector Maximum voltage 42V dc Maximum current 200 mA Class 2 power source required Switched DC Supply voltage 24V dc 30 mA Supply voltage maximum 28V dc into an infi nite load Solid state Relay Optically isolated Zero cross switched Without contact suppression Minimum load current 500 uA rms 0 5A at 24 to 240V ac resistive 20 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive Maximum offstate leakage current 10 uA rms Use RC suppression for inductive loads Electromechanical Relay Form A Minimum load current 10 mA 2 A 240V ac or 30V dc resistive 125 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive Electrical life 100 000 cycles at rated current Use RC suppression for inductive loads Electromechanical Relay Form C Minimum load current 10 mA 2 A 240V ac or 30V dc resistive 125 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive Electrical life 100 000 cycles at rated current Use RC suppression for inductive loads Process Control or Retransmit Range selectable 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 5V dc 1 to 5V dc 0 to 10V dc Can reverse low and high values Reverse or direct acting 0 to 10V dc voltage output into 1 00
87. 9000 degrees or units 703 704 R W 1000 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 0 to 99990 minutes 705 706 R W 1000 0 to 9990 minutes 707 708 R W 1000 701 702 R W 1000 0 to 999000 degrees or units 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units 30000000 671 672 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD 79 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 gt PID Set 3 Parameter Name and Description Loop 1 PID Set 3 Indirect Prop Band Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units Loop 1 PID Set 3 Indirect Integral Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat Loop 1 PID Set 3 Indirect Derivative Set the heat indirect deriva tive time in minutes Loop 1 PID Set 3 Indirect Dead Band Set the offset of the heat indi rect proportional band from set point in process units Loop 1 PID Set 3 Direct Prop Band Set the cool direct proportional band from set point in process units Loop 1 PID Set 3 Direct Integral Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat Loop 1 PID Set 3 Direct Derivative Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes Loop 1 PID Set 3 Direct Dead Band Set the offset of the cool di rect proportional band from set point in process units Loop 1 PID Set 3 Crossover Point Set crossover value to switch from PID Set 3 to PID Set 4
88. A 1 E 106 2 14 6A 2 E 106 1 15 6A 1 F 106 2 15 6A 2 F Cross Over Point 1 Multiple PID Loop 1 or 30 000 000 to 9 000 000 Loopt 30 000 000 669 670 O DN Set value to switch from PID set 1 to PID set 2 1000 Loop 2 anche 789 790 DANT RON Cross Over Point 2 Multiple PID Loop 1 or 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Loop 1 30 000 000 671 672 Set value to switch from PID set 2 to PID set 3 1000 Loop 2 ae ase 791 792 re cs SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 176 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations __ Default__ _ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type Access Cross Over Point 3 Multiple PID Loop 1 or 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Loop 1 30 000 000 Set value to switch from PID set 3 to PID set 4 2 Configuration 1000 Loop 2 i or 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Cross Over Point 4 Multiple PID Loop 1 or Set value to switch from PID set 4 to PID set 5 2 Configuration 1000 Device Configuration gt Outputs gt Output 1 to 4 E eed EE Output Function Select the function of the output Output Direction Select whether the output will perform heating indirect action or cooling direct action Control Source Set which loop will control the output Output Cycle Time Set the cycle time in seconds Output Mode Time Base Select whether the output will operate with a fixed or variable time based control System Line Frequency Specify the line frequency to use if zero
89. Access Ramp Action Off 0 Select what event s trigger a ramp to set point Startup 1 Control Loop 1 or 2 SP Change 2 Configuration Ramp Rate Set the interval of degrees or units that the ramping set point will change per minute or hour as determined by the Ramp Interval setting Control Loop 1 or 2 Configuration Ramp Interval Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 Multiple PID Sets Cross Over Source Specify whether to switch the PID sets based on upe a 090p iior ROCESS vee 0 000p Process Value 0 2 Configuration Set Point 1 Loop 2 the set point or process value Heat Indirect Propband Loop 1 Set 1 Set the heat indirect proportional band in process Loop 1 Set 2 units Loop 1 Set 3 Loop 1 Set 4 Loop 1 Set 5 Loop 2 Set 1 Loop 2 Set 2 Loop 2 Set 3 Loop 2 Set 4 Loop 2 Set 5 Heat Indirect Integral Loop 1 Set 1 Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per Loop 1 Set 2 repeat Loop 1 Set 3 Loop 1 Set 4 Loop 1 Set 5 Loop 2 Set 1 Loop 2 Set 2 Loop 2 Set 3 Loop 2 Set 4 Loop 2 Set 5 Loop 1 Set 1 Loop 1 Set 2 Loop 1 Set 3 Loop 1 Set 4 Loop 1 Set 5 Loop 2 Set 1 Loop 2 Set 2 Loop 2 Set 3 Loop 2 Set 4 Loop 2 Set 5 Multiple PID Loop 1 or 2 Configuration 1 000 to 999 000 1000 Multiple PID Loop 1 or 0 to 99 990 1000 2 Configuration Heat Indirect Derivative Set the heat indirect derivative time in minutes Multiple PID Loop 1 or 2 Co
90. Control Type S or D S Single channel D Dual channel Auxiliary Inputs 1 2 or3 1 Dual digital inputs 2 One CT input and one digital input 3 Dual CT inputs dual channel only Output 1 C K F or J C Switched dc open collector K SSR Form A 0 5 A F Universal process J Mechanical relay Form A 2 A Output 2 A C K or E A None C Switched dc open collector K SSR Form A 0 5 A E Mechanical relay Form C 2 A Output 3 A C K F or J A None C Switched dc open collector K SSR Form A 0 5 A F Universal process J Mechanical relay Form A 2 A Output 4 A C K or E A None C Switched dc open collector K SSR Form A 0 5 A E Mechanical relay Form C 2 A Datalogging 0 or 1 0 None 1 2 megabytes of on board memory Custom options AA or BB AA Watlow logo BB No logo Note Available only if F output option is selected for Output 1 Accessories 120 ac input 24 dc output Class 2 power supply 0830 0474 0000 12 pin removable screw terminal connector 0836 1279 0012 14 pin removable screw terminal connector 0836 1280 0014 Watlow Series PD 148 Appendix Declaration of Conformity Series PD Watlow Winona Inc 1241 Bundy Blvd Winona MN 55987 USA Declares that the following product Designation Series PD Model Numbers PD D or S 0 to 9 C F J or K A C E or K A C F J or K A C E or K 0 or 1 any three letters or numbers Classification Temperature contr
91. D may display the time in UTC Universal Standard Time or GMT Watlow Series PD 140 Chapter 10 Features Get Server IP from Server Name Log File Data Using the server name entered in the Time Server The first character of each line of data in the data Name field the unit will attempt to resolve the server s file identifies the line function name through the DNS Domain Name Server to ob tain the correct IP address This is useful in case the IP laa address of the time server would ever change i Date Time Time Zone Fixed Server Address and Column Entered at The Series PD will use the IP address in the Time the start of the log file or whenever the Log Set tings are changed Version Log file version record en tered only at the start of the log file Fixed Server Address field to locate the time server Units Identifies the configured input units F C volts or current Entered at the start of a log file or if the units are changed The time server specified should be the same time zone as the Series PD The last synchronization occurred at This field indicates the last time that the time syn chronization with the time server occurred This typical ly happen when the synchronization is first configured when the Series PD is restarted or every 15 minutes Synchronization Notes e Many time servers are configured to pass the time as UTC Universal Standard Time or GMT Most
92. E pre i aj i Mack e Ni i7 ye Serim L Bu a C g Figure 25 Device Information Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 25 Chapter 6 Device Information Tag S gt rs 11 Device Information Configuration Parameters Inputs Universal Input Sensor Type Digital Input Function Current Transformer Input INFOSENSE INFOSENSE Data Measured System Line Frequency Outputs Output 1 4 Control Loops Loop Action Loop Cool Algorithm Loop Heat Algorithm Device Identification Device Name Part Number MAC Address Section Description Displays what input hardware is present and input configuration information Inputs 1 and 2 are universal analog inputs and will accept a wide variety of input signals Input 2 is an ordering op tion See model number information Inputs 3 and 4 can be ordered as digital or current transformer in puts See model number information Digital Input Function displays what action is taken when the digital input condition is satisfied Current Transformer Input displays what CT hardware is pres ent and enabled Displays specific sensor data when connected to an INFOSENSE sensor The part number serial number and calibration date in formation is retrieved from the INFOSENSE sensor Displays system power
93. ENS o Proportional Band Temperature Time Independent Heat and Cool PID In an application with one output assigned to heating and another assigned to cooling each will have a separate set of PID parameters and separate dead bands The heat ing parameters take effect when the process temperature is lower than the set point and the cooling parameters take effect when the process temperature is higher than the set point To view or change the PID Parameter values go to De vice Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt PID Parameters Enter values for Pro portional Band Integral Derivative and Dead Band and click the Submit button to send the new values Cooling Side Proportional Band Cooling Side Dead Band Set Point Heating Side Dead Band Temperature Heating Side Proportional Band Time Multiple PID Sets The Series PD supports up to five heat cool PID sets This feature is extremely valuable if the characteristics of your thermal system vary over its operating range All PID sets can be auto tuned or manually tuned The Se ries PD can be programmed to operate using any of the five PID sets based on crossover points of the set point or process value When the process or set point value crosses the crossover point the PID set designated for that region of the operating range is used to control the percent power being supplied to the load There is a 1 hystere
94. Email Web Page Your Range Settings Parameter Name and Description Email SMTP Server Name Specify email SMTP server name Configuration Network Email Email SMTP Server IP Reso Configuration Network lution Email Specify preference to determine SMTP server IP resolution Name 0 Email SMTP Server Fixed Address Specify SMTP server fixed IP address Configuration Network Email Up to 30 alpha numeric characters Email Source Email Address Configuration Network Specify return source of sub Email mitted email This source is included in sent emails Up to 30 alpha numeric characters Email Email Recipient 1 Configuration Network Specify an email recipient Up Email to four mail boxes may receive an email Up to 30 alpha numeric characters Email Email Recipient 2 Configuration Network Specify an email recipient Up Email to four mail boxes may receive an email Up to 30 alpha numeric characters Email Email Recipient 3 Configuration Network Specify an email recipient Up Email to four mail boxes may receive an email Up to 30 alpha numeric characters Email Email Recipient 4 Configuration Network Specify an email recipient Up Email to four mail boxes may receive an email Get Server IP From Server Get Server IP Fixed Server Address 1 2147483647 to 2147483647 Modbus Read write and scaling Default R W
95. Fani E 4 Adorn 4f Denain Alarm Set Foti F eo aua 5 Aira a Current Transfomer Alarm Parameters prer Measremeni ET input 4 D ee 5 BAs Alarm Set Foin hg ampi jpe d E Oate basen EH Fiabe Sprin Alarm Email Parameters Caira yr Send Emal Yos l b A Emal Subcl fone Alam ii C General Alarm Settimps Alarm Hysteresis E SE 10 Latching ions e a Sencar Cet I Misc loner Posar Ciri mmmn 13 Subrat Resal Figure 43 Alarm Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 43 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Alarm Configuration Parameters Alarm l Type Process Alarm Parameters 2 Process Alarm Source 3 Process Alarm Set Point Deviation Alarm Parameters 4 Deviation from Loop Set Point 4 Deviation Alarm Set Point Current Transformer Alarm Parameters 6 Measurement 7 Alarm Set Point Alarm Email Parameters 8 Send Email P Email Subject Alarm Email Parameters 10 Alarm Hysteresis n p Latching n re Silencing 13 Blocking Parameter Description Selects the type of alarm Off disabled Low Process High Process Low Deviation High Deviation CT Low Alarm or CT High Alarm Selects the input assigned to the process alarm Process Value 1 or Process Value 2 Loop 2 available on dual channe
96. Hepi led Conf iDirven Hyra 2 SRS p Tag PID PFaramtiers Elari Aut clues 11 Bast Tae i 3 HH Ti E ET Aahar Set Puen po 1 PID Set Ho Prop Hand Dead and Lire p De i 7 Easmp To Sei Pout Parameters Hie Aiton Ramp Or Pi Lin 3 j R Dune 0 Per M g r Buberet Reset 19 90 Figure 35 Control Loop Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 35 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Control Loop Configuration Parameters Control Loop 1 Loop Action P Loop Heat indirect Algorithm 3 Loop Cool direct Algorithm Input Failure Parameters 4 Failure Latching 5 Output transition from Auto Mode to 6 Failure Fixed Power Set Point Limits i Low Limit High Limit On Off Parameters P Hysteresis Heat indirect 10 Hysteresis Cool direct PID Parameters 17 PID Set 1 Dead Band Ramp to Set Point Parameters 18 Ramp Action 1 Start Autotune K Autotune Set Point S PID Sets Ps PID Set 1 Proportional Band B PID Set 1 Integral ps PID Set 1 Derivative 19 Ramp Rate 20 Ramp Rate Time Units Parameter Description Sets the Control Loop output action Off disabled heat cool or heat cool Sets the Heat output method of control PID or On Off Sets the input sensor failure latching acti
97. Input 4 to switch control Loop 1 off Digital Input 4 Switch Con trol Loop 2 Off Select to use Digital Input 4 to switch control Loop 2 off Digital Input 4 Digital Set Point Specify Digital Set Point value to switch to when Digital Input 4 is activated Digital Input Switch Control Loop 1 Off Status Indicates that a digital input is forcing Control Loop 1 off Indicates that a digital input is forcing Control Loop 2 off Digital Input Switch Control Loop 1 to Manual Control Status Indicates that a digital input is forcing Control Loop 1 to manual mode of operation Digital Input Switch Control Loop 2 To Manual Control Status Indicates that a digital input is forcing Control Loop 2 to manual mode of operation Web Page Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration CT In put 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Monitor Device Monitor Device Monitor Device Your Settings Range No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 Within set point limits Inactive 0 Active 1 Inactive 0 Active 1 Inactive 0 Active 1 Inactive 0 Active 1 Modbus Read write and scaling Default No 0 379 R W 386 387 R W 1000 No 0 No 0 No 0 No 0 No 0 J
98. LARM STATUS Instance 1 Bit 09 1 Alarm 2 Silenced tag _ALARM_STATUS Instance 2 Bit 10 Bit 11 1 Alarm 3 Silenced tag _ALARM_STATUS Instance 3 j Bit 12 1 j j j Alarm 4 Silenced tag_ALARM_STATUS Instance 4 Alarm 5 Silenced tag _ ALARM_STATUS Instance 5 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Alarm 6 Silenced tag _ALARM_STATUS Instance 6 Alarm 7 Silenced tag_ALARM_STATUS Instance 7 Alarm 8 Silenced tag_ALARM_STATUS Instance 8 Z N N NST ee Ol 162 In sections 2 2 3 and 2 2 4 above words 9 and 10 of the output assembly are defined as Al ERROR_ACK and ALARM_ ACTIONS respectively The definition of the bits within those words follows Bit 00 1 Acknowledge Al 1 Error tag Ul Al ERROR ACKNOWLEDGED Instance 1 Bit 01 1 Acknowledge Al 2 Error tag Ul Al ERROR ACKNOWLEDGED Instance 2 Bit 02 Bit 03 Bit 04 Bit 05 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Bit 06 Reserved Bit 07 Reserved Output Assembly Word 9 EIP_ Al ERROR_ACK Clear Latched Alarm 1 tag_ALARM_LATCH_ACTION Instance 1 Clear Latched Alarm 2 tag _ALARM_LATCH_ACTION Instance 2 Clear Latched Alarm 3 tag _ALARM_LATCH_ACTION Instance 3 Clear Latched Alarm 4 tag _ALARM_LATCH_ACTION Instance 4 Clear Latched Alarm 5 tag _ALARM_LATCH_ACTION Instance 5 Clear Latched Alarm 6 tag _ALARM_LATCH_ACTION Insta
99. On Off control This determines how far into the on region the input needs to move before the output turns on Loop 1 On Off Direct Hys teresis Set the control switching direct hysteresis for On Off control This determines how far into the on region the input needs to move before the output turns on Loop 1 Start Autotune Activates autotuning of PID values Loop 1 Autotune Set Point Set Autotune set point in Loop 1 PID Sets 1 Select to use single or multiple PID Sets for Loop 1 Loop 1 Ramp Action Select the ramp to set point action for Control Loop 1 Loop 1 Ramp Rate Enter ramp to set point rate for Control Loop 1 Loop 1 Ramp Interval Select the scale of the ramp rate for Control Loop 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Your Settings Range Off 0 Fixed Power 1 Bumpless Power 2 10000 to 10000 two decimal places z z g z a o oO T Z ww Naw 1000 to 99000 degrees or units 1000 to 99000 degrees or units No 0 Yes 1 50 to 150 Single 0 Multiple 1 Off 0 Startup 1 SP Change 2 Startup and SP Change 3 0
100. Output 3 104 3 9 68 3 9 471 Output 4 511 Output Source Alarm 3 Output 1 104 1 10 68 1 A 402 Enable Alarm 3 to trigger the output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 10 68 2 A 442 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 10 68 3 A 472 Output 4 512 Output Source Alarm 4 Output 1 104 1 11 68 1 B 403 Enable Alarm 4 to trigger the output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 11 68 2 B 443 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 11 68 3 B 473 Output 4 513 Output Source Alarm 5 Output 1 104 1 12 68 1 C 404 Enable Alarm 5 to trigger the output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 12 68 2 C 444 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 12 68 3 C 474 Output 4 514 Output Source Alarm 6 Output 1 104 1 13 68 1 D 405 Enable Alarm 6 to trigger the output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 13 68 2 D 445 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 13 68 3 D 475 Output 4 515 Output Source Alarm 7 Output 1 104 1 14 68 1 E 406 Enable Alarm 7 to trigger the output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 14 68 2 E 446 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 14 68 3 E 476 Output 4 516 Output Source Alarm 8 Output 1 104 1 15 68 1 F 407 Enable Alarm 8 to trigger the output Output 1 to 4 No 0 Output 2 104 2 15 68 2 F 447 UINT R W Configuration Yes 1 Output 3 104 3 15 68 3 F 477 Output 4 517 Output Source Digital Input 3 Output 1 104 1 16 68 1 10 429 Enable Digital Input
101. P resolution method for the time server Get Server IP from DHCP Get Server IP from Server Name or Fixed Server Address Enter the time server name Enter the time server fixed IP address Displays time and date of the last clock synchronization Figure 54 Datalog Configuration Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 54 Chapter 7 Configuration Page File System The File System folder contains links for working with the datalogging files and the Series PD web page ap pearance The File System links are e File Manager e Web View Note File System folder only appears on models with datalogging capabilities File Manager Page The File Manager page provides a list of all the files stored in the Series PD Basic file operations like viewing deleting and saving files are performed on this page The Series PD on board storage is divided into two sections e Storage Device 0 for all datalog files e Storage Device 1 for other files like operating instructions cascade style sheets custom logos system dia grams contact information links to web sites etc Files with htm or html extensions will create hot links at the bottom of the Navigation Frame To view a file click on the file name To delete selected files click the check box of the files to delete and click on the Delete Selected button for that Storage Device Be sure to save any data you want to keep to another location before deleting files from the Se
102. Password box appears and you are prompted to enter Network Password information The default User Name is new and Password is user 1 Select Calibrate Analog Output x Select Low Volts Click on Apply Signal Measure actual output signal to 3 decimal places at appropriate output terminals and enter value in box Click on Calibrate Select Go Back To Calibration Page Select High Volts Repeat steps 3 through 6 Select Low Milliamps 10 Repeat steps 3 through 6 11 Select High Milliamps 12 Repeat steps 3 through 6 13 Select Go Back To Calibration Page 14 Verify calibration and rewire for operation COND OF FP WD DW Watlow Series PD 61 Chapter 8 Calibration Page 9 Parameter Tables These tables contain detailed information for the all of the parameters contained in Series PD controller The tables consist of six fields for each parameter listed These are e Parameter Name and Description name of the parameter and a brief description Some functions may have more detailed information available in the Features chapters e Web Page web page the parameter appears on e Settings blank column to allow you to document your Series PD settings e Range numeric range or selection choices e Default factory default values e Modbus Modbus register numbers the read write status and the scaling factor of the Modbus value The parameters are grouped together by function and are in the order that they ap
103. R W 1000 412 413 R W 1000 414 415 R W 1000 416 417 R W 1000 mn bo pm lt 5 D D D F S do O Rea Ner Process Value 422 R W 1 0 2000000200 423 424 R W 1000 2000000200 425 426 R W 1000 427 428 R W 1000 Inactive 0 397 R Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Outputs gt Output 2 Parameter Name and Description Output 2 Function Select the function of the output Output 2 Output Direction Select whether the output will be for heating reverse action or cooling direct action Output 2 Control Source Set Loop which will control this output Output 2 Output Cycle Time Set the cycle time in seconds Output 2 Output Mode Time Base Select method of output con trol as either Fixed Time Base or Variable Time Base Output 2 Low Power Scale Set unit value for low power scale This setting is the process power value when the analog output is at minimum Output 2 High Power Scale Set unit value for high power scale This setting is the process power value when the analog output is at maximum Output 2 Logic Operator Select logic operation for event output Output 2 Output Source Alarm 1 Set to enable Alarm 1 source Output 2 Output Source Alarm 2 Set to enable Alarm 2 source Output 2 Output Source Alarm 3 Set to enable Alarm 3 source Web Page Your R
104. S VALUE Numeric 101 1 18 DINT tag CLC WORKING_SETPOINT Numeric 101 1 33 INT tag CLC WORKING_SETPOINT Numeric 101 1 a INT tag EIP_CL_POWER_ Numeric 10 1 NT tag_EIP_CL_POWER tag_CL_METHOD UINT tag_CL_METHOD Enumerated 101 1 42 UINT tag_EIP_ALARM_STATUS Numeric 101 1 98 WORD tag AI ERROR O Enumerated 101 1 4 UN _ tag AI ERROR O Enumerated 101 1 9 INT tag AI ERROR O O Enumerated 101 1 19 INT 155 tag_EIP_T20 DYNAMIC_ASSEMBLY_POINT nuUMene 109 1 STRUCT OF 8 BIT CIA ag EIP T20_DYNAMIC_ASSEMBLY POINT Numeris 109 2 1 STRUCTOF 8IT CIR tag_EIP_T2O_DYNAMIC_ASSEMBLY_POINT Numeric 109 3 1 STRUCT OF 8 BITCIA_ tag EIP_T20 DYNAMIC ASSEMBLY POINT Numeric 109 4 1 STRUCTOF8BIT CIA tag_EIP_T20_DYNAMIC_ASSEMBLY POINT Numeric 109 6 1 STRUCTOFS BITCIA_ tag_EIP_T2O_DYNAMIC_ASSEMBLY_POINT Numeric 109 8 1 STRUCT OF 8 BITCIA_ tag_EIP_T2O_DYNAMIC_ASSEMBLY_POINT Numeric 109 9 1 STRUCT OF 8 BITCIA_ When using the T gt O Dynamic Assembly Input the size would be determined by the tag name being retrieved As an example because the Loop 1 Alarm Setpoint formatted as a DINT is not read in the Static Assembly it may be desired to read this tag via the Dynamic Assembly The input assembly size would change accordingly for the given formats DINT 12 INT 24 2 2 8 O gt T Static Assembly EIP Par
105. SR 2 Process 3 Relay C 5 19 R 1043 R 1044 R 1047 R 1048 R 1045 R 1046 R Z Z Z Z Z p 5 5 5 5 z 5 5 5 5 5 S S S S S 1049 R None 0 1050 R None 0 1051 R None 0 1052 R Watlow Series PD 122 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page and Description Hardware Number of Possi Device Information ble Analog Inputs Display total number of analog inputs available Hardware Number of Possi Device Information ble Digital Inputs Display total number of digital inputs available Hardware Number of Possi Device Information ble Outputs Display total number of out puts available Hardware Number of Analog Device Information Inputs Implemented Display number of analog inputs implemented Hardware Number of Out Device Information puts Implemented Display number of outputs implemented Hardware Date Code Device Information Identifies the manufacture date Hardware Serial Number Device Information Identifies the individual controllers serial number Hardware CJC Temperature 1 Device Information Display the cold junction compensation temperature Hardware CJC Temperature 2 Device Information Display the cold junction compensation temperature Your Range Default Modbus Settings Read write and scaling 1 to 4 R l R 2147483647 to
106. Series PD User s Manual Ethernet Enabled Temperature Process Controller d TOTAL CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Be LOW 1241 Bundy Boulevard Winona Minnesota USA 55987 Phone 1 507 454 5300 Fax 1 507 452 4507 http Awww watlow com caret Company inona Minnesota USA 0600 0043 0010 Rev B Made in the U S A November 2006 15 00 CAUTION or WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard CAUTION or WARNING Safety Information We use note caution and warning symbols throughout this book to draw your attention to important operational and safety information A NOTE marks a short message to alert you to an important detail A CAUTION safety alert appears with information that is important for protecting your equipment and performance Be especially careful to read and follow all cautions that apply to your application A WARNING safety alert appears with information that is important for protecting you others and equipment from damage Pay very close attention to all warnings that apply to your application The safety alert symbol A an exclamation point in a triangle precedes a general CAUTION or WARNING statement The electrical hazard symbol A a lightning bolt in a triangle precedes an electric shock hazard CAUTION or WARNING safety statement Technical Assistance If you encounter a problem with your Watlow controller review your configuration informa tion to verify that your sel
107. Set Point Set the alarm deviation set point in degrees or units from set point Alarm 2 CT Measurement Source Select source of current trans former measurement to gener ate Alarm 2 Alarm 2 CT Alarm Set Point Enter current transformer set point for Alarm 2 to activate Modbus Web Page Your Range Default Settings Read write and scaling Inactive 0 116 R 119 120 R W 1000 Loop 1 0 547 R W 1 117 118 R W 1000 548 R W 30000000 to 30000000 units 121 122 R W 1000 Inactive 0 Active 1 Silenced 2 Monitor Device Trend Information Off 0 Low Process 1 High Process 2 Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 2 Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 1 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 2 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 2 Configuration Alarm 2 Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 2 Off 0 Process Value 3 2 Process Value 4 3 Configuration Alarm 2 Configuration Alarm 2 Watlow Series PD 102 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Alarm 2 Send Email Enable Select to enable an email to be sent on activation of Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Email Alert
108. Subject Enter subject of email for Alarm 2 This message will appear in the subject line of the sent email Alarm 2 Alarm Hysteresis Select hysteresis value Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can clear Alarm 2 Latching Enable Select to enable alarm to be latched Latched alarms must be manually cleared when the process returns to a safe value Alarm 2 Latching Action Select to cause an active alarm to clear if latching is enabled and the process returns to a safe value Alarm 2 Silencing Enable Select to enable alarm silenc ing Silencing allows the oper ator to disable alarm while the controller is in an alarm state Alarm 2 Silence Action Select to cause an active alarm to silence if silencing is enabled Alarm 2 Blocking Select to prevent a low alarm from triggering when the process temperature is initial ly lower than the alarm set point due to power on or set point change Also applies to high alarms Web Page Your Settings Configuration Alarm 2 Configuration Alarm 2 Configuration Alarm 2 Configuration Alarm 2 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 2 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 2 Modbus Read write and scaling Range Default E 553 554 R W 1000 No 0 Yes 1 Up to 30 alpha numeric characters 0 to 2000000200 degrees or units No 0 Yes
109. TAS Analog Input 2 USORE 102 2 3 66 2 3 283 os bal Process Precision Indicates the number of decimal places displayed oo P a aa Analog Input 1 or 2 Analog Input 1 108 1 34 6C 1 22 1108 on the web page for a process input This can be o 0 UINT l Configuration Analog Input 2 108 1 38 6C 1 26 1119 changed using the Series PD web page Process Units l Analog Input 1 or 2 Up to four alphanumeric Analog Input 1 108 1 36 6C 1 24 1110 1111 Udlectes ME Units IOF PrOCESS type Mpls Configuration Analog Input 2 108 1 40 6C 1 28 Hektrio OFOBISTRRG displayed in the web browser Low Process Scale SOTIA VA UG TRAT ona one IO Analog Input 1 or 2 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Analog Input 1 102 1 8 66 1 8 262 263 analog input value is at its minimum as Contiauration Analda acne 30 000 000 102 2 8 66 2 8 292 293 DINT R W determined by the Low Voltage Scale or Low 9 pace Current Scale High Process Scale poh MONAHO ATW een eee aon Da Analog Input 1 or 2 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Analog Input 1 102 1 9 66 1 9 264 265 analog PUT VA Ue 1S atts maximntinn as Configuration 1000 Analog Input 2 90 000 000 102 2 9 66 2 9 294 295 cal ne determined by the High Voltage Scale or High g gimp Current Scale Low Voltage Scale l Analog Input 1 or 2 Analog Input 1 102 1 6 66 1 6 258 259 Set the input process voltage in Volts that will Configuration O to 10 000 1000 Analog Input 2 102 2 6 66 2 6 288 289 DINT correspond
110. Under Range Fault 2 Over Range Fault 3 Under Flow Fault 4 Over Flow Fault 5 INFOSENSE Fault 6 Lead Compensation Fault 7 No Fault 0 Under Range Fault 2 Over Range Fault 3 Under Flow Fault 4 Over Flow Fault 5 No Fault 0 Under Range Fault 2 Over Range Fault 3 Under Flow Fault 4 Over Flow Fault 5 Thermocouple 1 Voltage Process 3 Current Process 4 INFOSENSE PnP 5 DIN 0 385 0 No Fault 0 37 R DIN 0 385 0 253 R W Watlow Series PD OD a Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling Up to four alpha numeric characters Analog Input 1 Process Units Configuration Analog 1110 1111 R Set the units for process type Input 1 inputs that will be displayed in the browser only 30000000 to 30000000 units 30000000 262 263 R W 1000 Analog Input 1 Low Process Configuration Analog Scale Input 1 Set unit value for low process scale This setting is the dis played process value when the analog input is at minimum 30000000 to 30000000 units 30000000 264 265 R W 1000 Analog Input 1 High Process Configuration Analog Scale Input 1 Set unit value for high process scale This setting is the dis played process value when the analog input is at maximum 0 to 10000 units 258 259 R W 1000 A
111. _ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type Access Parameters to Data Log Alarm 1 to 8 Status Alarm 1 107 1 11 6B 1 C Specify to whether to include the corresponding Alarm 2 107 1 12 6B 1 D alarm status in the datalog Alarm 3 107 1 13 6B 1 E l No 0 Alarm 4 107 1 14 6B 1 F Datalog Configuration Yes 1 Alane No 0 107 1 15 6B 1 10 UINT R W Alarm 6 107 1 16 6B 1 11 Alarm 7 107 1 17 6B 1 12 Alarm 8 107 1 18 6B 1 13 Specif the timed interval of datalog updates Palalog Vontigiration 1 nds 1 ies eS ll re au di Specify the units for the data logging interval Paad omgutation heen acces Ee ean uae me togging Date Compression Datalog Configuration no 107 128 68 1117 6B 1 17 pte UN Enable compression of datalog files Yes When Log File is Full Overwrite 0 Specify the action to be taken when the datalog fila Datalog Configuration Overwrite 0 Web page only Web page only is full Stop logging 1 Write Log File to TFTP Server No 0 Enable automatic transfer of datalog files to the Datalog Configuration Yes 1 No 0 Web page only Web page only TFTP server TFTP Server Name Enter the name of the TFTP server to which Datalog Configuration Web page only Web page only datalog files will be transferred TFTP Server Fixed Address 2 147 483 647 to Enter the IP address of the TFTP server to which Datalog Configuration 1 062 731 775 Web page only Web page only s 2 147 483 647 datalog files will be
112. _Assembly_PD Contral Description T gt O Static Assembly Stricture hembers Data Type Size 44 bytes Hame Data Type Style Description Al Anche Py Dlr T 4 Decimal Analog Input 4uchve Process Value CL workings F DIM T 2 Decimal Control Loop working Set Point CL Power IMT 2 Decimal Control Loop Power LL ControlMlode INT 2 Decimal Control Loop Control Mode DIO State INT Binary Digital l O State E 4 Lhd Status INT Binary Alarm Status l Al ErrorSstatus hd T 41 Decimal Analoga Inout Error Statys oe OO ere Data Type PD_Static_Assembly_Control PD im lEz MM ame PD_S tatic 4ecembly Control2zPo Description O gt T Static Assembly Structure Members Data Type Size 20 byte s Hame Data Type Style Description Em CL_Setpoint DINT 2 Decimal Control Loop SP a Manual SP IMT 2 Decimal Manual SP EE LL CtrlMethod JINT 2Z Decimal Control Method 41 Fature ck INT Decimal Analog Input Failure Latching 4cknowlhedge ALM Auctions INT Decimal Alarm Latching Silence Actions ee ere 160 Being able to create these user defined data types allows for a much less complex program making it easier for all to understand The last step prior to getting to the programming is to create a tag or tags that will use these data types There will be one tag created for the PD inputs and another for the PD outputs The two files that were created to use these
113. aam f za Ly oT We E EL F ai a B F a i Bil Zt Coo Secor Adubnh AD Sai i ion i Dia fii a Aa emmy E of ary 4 Low Tis vation Iacie 3 Foen T Low Alarm iain Abra m iii dims E Fuh Srn War Fer Catteries Low Process Ince jirg Palea m a Sdence Alain Ack noms dpe Alarm i e a a amp miad be E HWE oF Bri Wiri Figure 28 Device Configuration Navigation Frame Expanded Example Watlow Series PD 28 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Inputs The Inputs folder contains links for configuring the inputs installed in the Series PD The controller leaves the factory with default settings that disable all input functions To get the Series PD operational you must go through the Inputs links and set up the controller inputs The Inputs folder links are e Analog Input 1 e Analog Input 2 dual channel model only e Digital Input 3 or 4 e Current Transformer Input 3 or 4 Note You may not see all of the Inputs folder links listed above Your model number determines what input parameters appear Analog Input Configuration Page Inputs 1 and 2 are analog inputs Analog inputs are used to measure process variables like temperature humid ity pressure flow level etc The universal analog inputs accept most common thermocouple types 100Q Platinum RTD DIN curve and process input signals Input 2 only appears on dual channel models You can see and change all of the parameters on the Analog I
114. ad write and scaling Default Hardware Number of Digital Device Information Inputs Implemented Display number of digital inputs implemented Hardware Analog Input 1 Type Display analog input 1 hard ware type Hardware Analog Input 2 Type Display analog input 2 hard ware type Hardware Digital Input 3 Type Display digital input 3 hard ware type Hardware Digital Input 4 Type Display digital input 4 hard ware type Hardware CT Input 3 Type Display analog input 3 hard ware type Hardware CT Input 4 Type Display analog input 4 hard ware type Hardware Output 1 Type Display Output 1 hardware type Hardware Output 2 Type Display Output 2 hardware type Hardware Output 3 Type Display Output 3 hardware type Hardware Output 4 Type Display Output 4 hardware type Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Device Information Universal 1 Universal 1 None 0 Universal 1 None 0 Dry Contact 1 None 0 Dry Contact 1 None 0 Current Transformer 2 None 0 Current Transformer 2 Switched DC 1 SSR 2 Process 3 Relay A 4 None 0 Switched DC 1 SSR 2 Relay C 5 None 0 Switched DC 1 SSR 2 Process 3 Relay A 4 None 0 Switched DC 1 S
115. age Tag Datalog Configuration Parameter Description Parameters 1 Datalogging Activate the datalogging function Enable or Disable Parameters to Datalog 2 Process Value 1 and 2 Selects the analog input values for Input 1 and Input 2 to be logged Input 2 only appears on dual channel models 3 Working Set Point 1 and 2 Selects the active set point values for Input 1 and Input 2 to be logged Input 2 only appears on dual channel models The working set point could be one of several set point sources Auto Set Point Digital Set Point or Ramp to Set Point 4 Loop Power 1 and 2 Selects the output power level values for Loop 1 and Loop 2 to be logged Loop 2 only appears on dual channel models 5 Digital Input 3 and 4 Selects the digital input status for Input 3 and Input 4 to be logged These only appear on models where the digital inputs are installed 6 Current Transformer CT Selects the current transformer input value for Input 3 and Input 4 Input 3 and 4 to be logged These only appear on models where the digital inputs are installed T Alarm 1 8 Status Selects the alarm status for Alarms 1 8 to be logged Logging Parameters 8 Logging Interval Time Sets the time interval for logging the selected data 1 to 200 9 Logging Interval Units Selects the time units for the interval time for logging the selected data Seconds or Minutes 10 Logging Data Compression Selects the data compre
116. am EIP EIP ag CLO_SETPONT 1 nomere 142 a2 DINT tag CLC SETPONT __ __2__ _Numeric_ n2 1 40 DINT tag_ OLC _ SETPOINT Numeric 112 INT tag OLC SETPOINT 2 Numero n2 1 3s Nr tag CL METHOD 1 Enumerated 112 1 34 UNT tag EIP_AI ERROR_ACK 1 Numeric 112 1 99 WORD See Class Instance and Attribute Descriptions beginning on page 169 for enumerated values If using the O gt T Static Assembly Output the following sizes should be defined in RSLogix5000 for the following Comm Formats DINT 5 INT 10 2 2 4 O gt T Dynamic Assembly Param EIP EIP EIP Data 156 tag _CL_ METHOD 2 Enumerated 113 1 42 UINT ag EIP ALARM_ACTIONS 1 Numere iis i 100 WORD STRUCT Sarona manr we e BIT CIA STRUCT rarosa o ome a U BIT CIA STRUCT tag_EIP_O2T_DYNAMIC_ASSEMBLY_POINT Numeric OF 8 BIT CIA STRUCT OF 8 BIT CIA STRUCT BIT CIA STRUCT BIT CIA STRUCT pronomen wom vel BIT CIA STRUCT pronoms 7 ame 7 ge BIT CIA STRUCT pronomes wme gS BIT CIA pronomen ame foe pronomes e ame fm e When using the O gt T Dynamic Assembly Output the size would be determined by the tag name being written to As an example because the Closed Loop Tuning Action formatted as a UINT is not being written to via the Static Assembly it may be desired to be able to change to Autotune via the control program
117. ange Settings Off 0 Control 1 Event 2 Configuration Output 2 Off 0 Heat Indirect 1 Cool Direct 2 Configuration Output 2 Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Fixed 0 Variable 1 Configuration Output 2 0 to 10000 two decimal places Configuration Output 2 0 to 10000 two decimal places Configuration Output 2 AND 0 OR 1 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 Configuration Output 2 0 1 to 60 seconds for non mechanical relay outputs 1 0 to 60 seconds for me chanical relay outputs Default Modbus Read write and scaling 432 R W 10 for mechanical 436 R W relay output 449 450 R W _ i D o 0 10 0 seconds 10000 451 452 R W 100 AND 0 439 R W No 0 N 440 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 441 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 442 R W Yes 1 Watlow Series PD co Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Output 2 Output Source Alarm 4 Set to enable Alarm 4 source Output 2 Output Source Alarm 5 Set to enable Alarm 5 source Output 2 Output Source Alarm 6 Set to enable Alarm 6 source Output 2 Output Source Alarm 7 Set to enable Alarm 7 source Output 2 Output Source Alarm 8 Set to enable Alarm 8 source Output 2 Output Source Digi tal 3 Set to enable Digital Input
118. ar if latching is enabled and the process returns to a safe value Alarm 7 Silencing Enable Configuration Alarm 7 Select to enable alarm silenc ing Silencing allows the oper ator to disable alarm while the controller is in an alarm state Alarm 7 Silence Action Monitor Device Select to cause an active alarm to silence if silencing is enabled Alarm 7 Blocking Configuration Alarm 7 Select to prevent a low alarm from triggering when the process temperature is initial ly lower than the alarm set point due to power on or set point change Also applies to high alarms Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 8 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range and Description Settings Default Modbus Read write and scaling Alarm 8 Status Monitor Device Display status of Alarm 8 Trend Information Inactive 0 Active 1 Silenced 2 Off 0 Low Process 1 High Process 2 Alarm 8 Type Monitor Device Select alarm type A process Configuration Alarm 8 alarm responds when the tem perature crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the temperature devi ates from the controlled set point by the alarm deviation set point Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 1 Alarm 8 Process Alarm Monitor Device Source Configuration Alarm 8 Select input where this alarm gets the inform
119. ata Types As can be seen in the chart below the data types used within the PD vary Because there is no status returned from the PD in either the static or dynamic assembly it is suggested that the Comm Format be configured for DINT or INT BOOL Boolean SINT 8 bit signed integer INT 16 bit signed integer DINT 32 bit signed integer USINT 8 bit unsigned integer UINT 16 bit unsigned integer UDINT 32 bit unsigned integer WORD 16 bit bit string 154 2 2 1 T gt O Static Assembly Param EIP EIP EIP Data tag_ Al ACTIVE PROCESS VALUE 100 DNT tag_Al_ACTIVE_PROCESS_VALUE et DINT tag AI ACTIVE PROCESS VALUE Numeric 100 1 13 DNT tag CLC WORKING SETPOINT Numeric 100 1 33 DINT tag CLC WORKING SETPOINT Numeric 100 1 41 DINT 1 N tag EIPCLPOWER Numeric 100 1 97 mN Teg CL METHOD Enumerated 100 a sunt tag CL METHOD Enumerated 100 1 42 UNT tag_ EIP DIO STATE Numeric 100 1 WORD tag_EIP_ALARM_STATUS Numeric 100 1 98 WORD tag ALERROR Enumerated 100 1 9 UNT See Class Instance and Attribute Descriptions beginning on page 169 for enumerated values If using the T gt O Static Assembly Input the following sizes should be defined in RSLogix5000 for the following Comm Formats DINT 11 INT 22 2 2 2 T gt O Dynamic Assembly a A Data Store Tag Type Class Attribute EIP Data Type ioi O DN Soe aoe te tag ALACTIVE PROCES
120. ate a scale range for special applications other than the standard ones listed above Reversing of the scales from high values to low values is permitted for analog input signals that have a reversed action For example 50 psi 4 mA and 10 psi 20 mA To view or change the input scale values go to Device Configuration gt Inputs gt Analog Input 1 or 2 gt Process Parameters gt Low Voltage Scale and High Voltage Scale for voltage inputs or Low Cur rent Scale and High Current Scale for current in puts Enter a value for Low Scale and High Scale Click the Submit button to send the new values Low Process Scale and High Process Scale With a process input you must choose a value to represent the low and high ends of the current or volt age range Choosing these values allows the controller s display to be scaled into the actual working units of measurement For example the analog input from a hu midity transmitter could represent 0 to 100 percent rel ative humidity as a process signal of 4 to 20 mA Low scale would be set to 0 to represent 4 mA and high scale set to 100 to represent 20 mA The indication on the dis play would then represent percent humidity and range from 0 to 100 percent with an input of 4 to 20 mA To view or change the Low Process Scale or High Process Scale values go to Device Configuration gt Inputs gt Analog Input 1 or 2 gt Process Parame ters gt Low Process Scale and High Proces
121. ation for com parison to the alarm set point Alarm 8 Process Alarm Monitor Device Set Point Trend Information Set the alarm process set Configuration Alarm 8 point in absolute degrees or units degrees or units Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Alarm 8 Deviation From Configuration Alarm 8 Source Select control loop where this alarm gets the control set point for comparison to the alarm set point Alarm 8 Deviation Alarm Monitor Device Set Point Trend Information Set the alarm deviation set Configuration Alarm 8 point in degrees or units from set point degrees or units Off 0 Process Value 3 2 Process Value 4 3 Alarm 8 CT Measurement Configuration Alarm 8 Source Select source of current trans former measurement to gener ate Alarm 8 Alarm 8 CT Alarm Set Point Configuration Alarm 8 Enter current transformer set point for Alarm 8 to activate 30000000 to 30000000 197 198 R W Inactive 0 194 R i 1000 2000000200 to 2000000200 195 196 R W 1000 30000000 to 30000000 units 199 200 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD 114 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Your Settings Parameter Name and Description Web Page Alarm 8 Send Email Enable Select to enable an email to be sent on activation of Alarm 8 Configuration Alarm 8 Alarm 8 Email Alert Subject Enter subject of email for Configuration Alarm 8 Alarm 8 This message will a
122. atus Input Number Input Value Input Status Control Loop Status Control Loop Number Control Loop Process Value Control Loop Working Set Point Control Loop Power Control Loop Auto Set Point Control Loop Manual Set Point Control Loop Mode Control Loop Status Alarm Status Alarm Number Alarm Type Alarm Input Alarm Status Alarm Set Point Alarm Silencing Alarm Latching any input that is in a fault condition Actual analog input value for Inputs 1 and 2 Digital Input condition or Current Transformer input value for Identifies input hardware that is installed Red box appears for Inputs 3 and 4 Input error status for analog digital or current transformer inputs Identifies control loop hardware that is installed Loop 2 appears only on dual loop models Actual analog input value for the control loop s Active analog inputs can be assigned to either contro loop Active set point Could be one of several set point sources Auto Set Point Digital Set Point or Ramp to Set Point Actual ouput power level for each control loop Automatic mode closed loop set point Click on the desired loop set point enter the new Auto Set Point value in the pop up win dow and click Submit The page refreshes and displays the new Monitor Device page data loop manual set point enter the new Manual Set Point value in the pop up window and click Submit The page refreshes and dis plays the new Monitor De
123. ave up to nine LED indicator lights to help you monitor the status of input power Ethernet functions input errors and outputs status These LEDs can provide a quick visual indication of basic controller functions An additional heartbeat LED used for diagnostics can be seen through the top vent at the back left side of the controller Power Green light stays lit when the power is on e If not lit or flashing check your power source Ethernet Link Green light is lit if the Ethernet cable is correctly wired and connected to a 10BaseT port e f not lit check for the correct RJ 45 cable and switch hub speed Ethernet Activity Green light is lit when commun ication activity occurs 1 Input Error Red light is lit if there is a sensor problem on Input 1 Lights momen tarily after power up e If it stays lit Verify the sensor wiring polarity and function Rewire or replace as necessary 2 Input Error Red light is lit if there is a sensor problem on Input 2 Lights momen tarily after power up e f it stays lit Verify the sensor wiring polarity and function Rewire or replace as necessary Heartbeat diagnostics Green light can be seen on the left side pc board through the top vents at the back of the unit 1 Output Red light is lit or flashes when control Output 1 is active If it does not light up the output is not active WATLOW PD The output may be configured as an PID Con
124. ays firmware release revision Current Network Settings 16 IP Address Displays IP address number Series PD supports DHCP client autoIP and fixed IP address assignment 17 Subnet Mask Displays current subnet mask 18 Default Gateway Displays current default gateway 19 DNS Server Displays current DNS server Figure 27 Device Information Web Page Tag Descriptions continued Watlow Series PD 21 Chapter 6 Device Information l Device Configuration Page The Device Configuration page contains folders and links for configuring the Series PD The controller leaves the factory with default settings that disable most input and output functions To get the Series PD operational you must go through the Device Configuration folders and set up the controller The Device Configuration folders are e Inputs e Control Loops e Outputs e Alarms e Network e Datalogging e File System Note You may not see all of the Device Configuration page folders listed above Your model number determines what folders appear i Ser I es f 4 P konmior Drvice remil Information bdo F aak n P ia E ia Fak 3 Arie DpH Inat Funches Acknoeledge Alamis 4 Gamp Ho Fak Control Loop Status CLr Eitor Loon i i amn mm a m j s a i Erun d Ti sj p p i t FrEE L m Il wil Fr aa EHT ant iriiri Loop Jaling BAWL EN i i ST 0 fa 7 iS Fabii Feed PUE E ij fit w Fasa Purim Haat lirekis ct FEE kh Pi
125. below the set point Process Temperature Temperature Time Proportional Control Some processes need to maintain a temperature or process value closer to the set point than on off control can provide Proportional control provides closer control by adjusting the output when the temperature or process value is within a proportional band When the value is in the band the controller adjusts the output based on how close the process value is to the set point The closer the process value is to the set point the low er the output power This is similar to backing off on the gas pedal of a car as you approach a stop sign It keeps the temperature or process value from swinging as widely as it would with simple on off control Howev er when the system settles down the temperature or process value tends to droop short of the set point With proportional control the output power level equals set point minus process value divided by the proportional band value Chapter 10 Features To view or change the Proportional Band value go to Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt PID Parameters gt PID Set 1 Prop Band Heat Indirect or PID Set 1 Prop Band Cool Direct Enter a value for Proportional Band and click the Submit button to send the new val ue Set Point Pa Proportional Band Temperature Time Proportional plus Integral PI Con
126. bios name resolution Configuration information may be entered at the Network Display Setup page Note If you forget the fixed IP address of your Series PD short the jumper connections on the top of the unit see page 5 turn the input power off and back on again This causes the Series PD to use DHCP first AutolP and finally fixed IP addressing to try assigning an IP address This allows you to read the current fixed IP address Once the unit is powered up without the jumper connections shorted the Series PD returns to using the previous IP addressing settings Watlow Series PD 21 Chapter 4 Ethernet Communications a Monitor Device Page When accessing a Series PD controller through a browser the Monitor Device page appears The Monitor De vice page contains real time information representing the current process conditions This information is loaded when the Monitor Device page is browsed and is automatically refreshed once every second The Monitor Device page provides real time information on e Input Status e Control Loop Status e Alarm Status Input errors and alarms appear on this page as a red box next to the related input or output These are re freshed once a second If you try to change any values on the Monitor Device page you are prompted to enter Network Password information The User Name is new and Password is user Be sure to change your user name and password if controller security is a concern If you want your browse
127. ble Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 2 gt PID Set 2 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling 815 816 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Indirect Configuration Multiple Prop Band PID Sets 2 Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 0 to 99990 minutes 817 818 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Indirect Configuration Multiple Integral PID Sets 2 Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat 0 to 9990 minutes 819 820 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Indirect Configuration Multiple Derivative PID Sets 2 Set the heat indirect deriva tive time in minutes 813 814 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Indirect Configuration Multiple Dead Band PID Sets 2 Set the offset of the heat indirect proportional band from set point in process units 0 to 999000 degrees or units 823 824 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Direct Configuration Multiple Prop Band PID Sets 2 Set the cool direct propor tional band from set point in process units 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 0 to 99990 minutes 825 826 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Direct Configuration Multiple Integral PID Sets 2 Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat 0 to 9990 minutes 827 828 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Direc
128. ble alarm silencing Silencing allows the operator to disable alarm while the con troller is in an alarm state Alarm 6 Silence Action Select to cause an active alarm to silence if silencing is enabled Alarm 6 Blocking Select to prevent a low alarm from triggering when the process temperature is initial ly lower than the alarm set point due to power on or set point change Also applies to high alarms Web Page Configuration Alarm 6 Configuration Alarm 6 Configuration Alarm 6 Configuration Alarm 6 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 6 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 6 Your Settings Range No 0 Yes 1 Up to 30 alpha numeric characters 0 to 2000000200 degrees or units No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 No 0 Yes 1 Off 0 Set Point Change 1 Power On 2 Set Point Change and Power On 3 Default Modbus Read write and scaling 609 610 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD 111 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 7 Parameter Name and Description Alarm 7 Status Display status of Alarm 7 Alarm 7 Type Select alarm type A process alarm responds when the tem perature crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the temperature devi ates from the controlled set point by the alarm deviation set point Alarm 7 Process Alarm Source Select input wher
129. ce 0 to 10000 units 0 to 10000 units Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 2 Set Point 1 1 Set Point 2 3 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units 9999000 to 9999000 de grees or units Inactive 0 Active 1 484 485 R W 1000 486 487 R W 1000 Process Value 492 R W 1 0 2000000200 493 494 R W 1000 2000000200 495 496 R W 1000 497 498 R W 1000 Inactive 0 467 R Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Outputs gt Output 4 Web Page Your Range Settings Parameter Name and Description Off 0 Control 1 Event 2 Output 4 Function Configuration Output 4 Select the function of the out put 0 1 to 60 seconds for non mechanical relay outputs 1 0 to 60 seconds for me chanical relay outputs Output 4 Output Cycle Time Configuration Output 4 Set the cycle time in seconds Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Output 4 Control Source Configuration Output 4 Set Loop which will control this output Fixed 0 Variable 1 Output 4 Output Mode Time Base Select method of output con trol as either Fixed Time Base or Variable Time Base Configuration Output 4 0 to 10000 two decimal places Output 4 Low Power Scale Configuration Output 4 Set unit value for low power scale This setting is the process power value when the analog output is at min
130. cess power value when the analog output is at minimum Output 3 High Power Scale Set unit value for high power scale This setting is the process power value when the analog output is at maximum Output 3 Output Direction Select whether the output will be for heating reverse action or cooling direct action Output 3 Logic Operator Select logic operation for event output Output 3 Output Source Alarm 1 Set to enable Alarm 1 source Output 3 Output Source Alarm 2 Set to enable Alarm 2 source Output 3 Output Source Alarm 3 Set to enable Alarm 3 source Your Range Settings Web Page Off 0 Control 1 Event 2 Configuration Output 3 Retransmit 3 0 1 to 60 seconds for non mechanical relay outputs 1 0 to 60 seconds for me chanical relay outputs Configuration Output 3 Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Configuration Output 3 Fixed 0 Variable 1 Configuration Output 3 0 to 10000 two decimal places Configuration Output 3 0 to 10000 two decimal places Configuration Output 3 Off 0 Heat Indirect 1 Cool Direct 2 Configuration Output 3 AND 0 OR 1 Configuration Output 3 Configuration Output 3 Configuration Output 3 No 0 Yes 1 Configuration Output 3 Modbus Read write and scaling 1 0 second for 1462 R W 10 non mech relay output 10 0 seconds for mechanical 488 489 R W 100 Defa
131. cimal places displayed in the web page for CT inputs This can be set in Range Scaling Iterations Default 0 to 20 000 1000 Analog Input 1 20000 Analog Input 2 ay Celsius 1 Analog Input 1 or 2 Configuration 102 1 5 66 1 5 102 2 5 66 2 5 Analog Input 1 or 2 Configuration Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 Off 0 Analog Input 1 Off 0 First ae Analog Input 2 100 to 60 000 1000 Analog input 1 Analog Input 2 9 999 000 to 9 999 000 Analog Input 1 1000 D Input 2 CT eu 6 3 Ane 108 1 35 6C 1 23 Fahrenheit 0 108 1 39 6C 1 27 Analog Input 1 or 2 Configuration 108 1 33 6C 1 21 108 1 37 6C 1 25 Analog Input 1 or 2 102 1 11 Configuration Analog Input 1 or 2 Configuration aa bee 3 bee Input 4 102 3 1 66 3 1 102 4 1 66 4 1 CT Input 3 or 4 Configuration CT Input 3 CT Input 4 CT Input 3 or 4 Indicates the units displayed in the web page for Configuration CT inputs This can be set in the web Low CT Scale Set the value that will be displayed when the CT Input 3 or 4 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 CT Input 3 102 3 8 66 3 8 current transformer CT input is at its minimum l 30 000 000 as deteriined by the Low Curent Scale Configuration 1000 CT Input 4 102 4 8 66 4 8 High CT Scale Set the value that will be displayed when the F eunen ransono C1 inputis at its maini CT Input 3 or 4 30 000 00
132. complete on the configuration tab proceed to the communication tab and click on the browse button to identify the path to the PD Figure 3 1 2a Data Log Read DL Enable os mie Type CIP Generic Message Control MGI Message Configuration MSG1 ES Configuration Communication Taq Message Type Service Get Attribute Single Source Element l Type Source Length T Bytes Service fe f jee Cade a Isel Clas BE Hex Destination Data_Logging_Interv Instance E Attribute 1 amp Hes Uee 2 Enable 2 Enable waiting 2 Start lt Done Done Length 3 2 Error Code Extended Error Code I Timed Our Error Path Error T est Cancel _ Message Configuration MSG gt lt Apply Configuration Communication Tag Path VA athow PO Browse we atlowm PO Eommanli S Messape Path Browser t CP r C a Fath ar atlow_ PO LIE We athow PO Con Ee a 1 0 Configuration Bl 1 1756 ENBT 7A EIP_Scanner Bl ETHERNET MODULE atlow_PD gt Enable 2 Error Cod Error Path Error Test Ck Cancel OF Cancel 164 Upon activation of the Data_Log_ Read input the internal value will be read into the tag named Data_Logging_Interval Not much changes in the write example The obvious changes are that the service now becomes a set operation and there needs to be a source tag holding the new int
133. consider when installing Ethernet based controls on any network e Use private IP addresses e Separate the process network s from business network s e If external access is required then have a single point of access to the process network e External access points should be protected by a firewall e External access points should be protected by a layer 3 switch or router e Access to the Internet should be indirect going through an access point to the business network on the way e Separate processes or cells using VLANs e Run virus protection software on all PC s on the process network Refer to the bottom of the web page navigation frame for the browser versions supported You may ac cess the Series PD and view controller parameters via an onboard Web HTTP server The Series PD supports full product configuration and monitoring of runtime parameters via MOD BUS TCP over TCP IP using a third party software package such as Lookout created and sold by Na tional Instruments The 10BaseT Ethernet connection supports the TCP IP stack At the application layer it has an HTTP web and Modbus server The HTTP server provides a means of changing runtime parameters via HTML The TCP IP stack supports DHCP client Auto IP Static IP DNS client and Netbios name resolution Getting Started 1 Connect the Series PD to your computer s Ethernet port using a cross wired RJ45 cable or connect the Series PD to a switch hub or network
134. controller to return the equipment to operational condition After you program the controller and verify proper operation save the settings into a special section of memory To save all user settings go to Device Configuration gt Calibration and click on the Save User Settings button If the settings in the controller get changed and you want to restore the last saved user settings go to Device Configuration gt Calibration and click on the Restore User Settings button Note Only perform the Save User Settings procedure when you are sure that all the correct settings are programmed into the controller Saving the settings overwrites any previously saved collection of settings Be sure to document all controller settings Watlow Series PD 59 Chapter 8 Calibration Page Calibrating the Series PD Warm up the Series PD for 20 minutes To reach the Calibration web page go to Device Configuration gt Calibration The Enter Network Password box appears and you are prompted to enter Network Password infor mation The default User Name is new and Password is user Be sure to change your user name and password if controller security is a concern If you want your browser to remember the User Name and Password after you enter it the first time check the box Save this password in your password list If you close your browser you must re enter your user name and password information A Caution Before performing a calibration all control loops s
135. ct labeled Load_New_Assembly_ Values is actuated the new values will be loaded and ready to be transferred to the PD The second rung when Write_New_Assembly_O2T is actuated will do a byte for byte transfer of the source tags ControlLogix to the destination tags PD In sections 2 2 1 and 2 2 2 above words 17 and 18 of the input assembly are defined as DIO_STATE and ALARM_STATUS respectively The definition of the bits within those words follows Input Assembly Word 17 EIP DIO STATE tag _DI_ STATE Instance 1 Bit 09 tag _DO_STATE Instance 2 tag _DI_ STATE Instance 2 Bit 10 tag DO STATE Instance 3 tag DO STATE Instance 1 Bit11 tag DO STATE Instance 4 Bits 02 07 amp Bits 12 15 Reserved Input Assembly Word 18 EIP_ALARM_STATUS Bit 00 0 Alarm 1 Inactive 1 Alarm 1 Active tag ALARM_STATUS Instance 1 Bit 01 0 Alarm 2 Inactive 1 Alarm 2 Active tag ALARM_STATUS Instance 2 Bit 02 0 Alarm 3 Inactive 1 Alarm 8 Active tag ALARM_STATUS Instance 3 Bit 03 0 Alarm 4 Inactive 1 Alarm 4 Active tag ALARM_STATUS Instance 4 Bit 04 0 Alarm 5 Inactive 1 Alarm 5 Active tag ALARM_STATUS Instance 5 Bit 05 0 Alarm 6 Inactive 1 Alarm 6 Active tag ALARM_STATUS Instance 6 Bit 06 0 Alarm 7 Inactive 1 Alarm 7 Active tag ALARM_STATUS Instance 7 Bit 07 O Alarm 8 Inactive 1 Alarm 8 Active tag ALARM_STATUS Instance 8 Bit 08 1 Alarm 1 Silenced tag A
136. current IP address 2 147 483 647 to Network Configuration 2 147 483 647 245 1 5 F5 1 5 Current Settings Subnet Mask Indicates the current IP subnet mask NewoicConiauaian 2 147 483 647 to g 2 147 483 647 245 1 5 F5 1 5 Current Settings Default Gateway Indicates the current gateway IP address 2 147 483 647 to Network Configuration 245 1 5 F5 1 5 2 147 483 647 Current Settings DNS Server Indicates the current DNS server IP address 2 147 483 647 to Network Configuration 2 147 483 647 245 1 5 F5 1 5 _ SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 18 ms Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type Access Fixed IP Address 2 147 483 647 to Specify the fixed IP addrass ONS MOMNGSNON __B4a7 488 647 O taa ee SOPR eee fw Fixed Subnet Mask 2 147 483 647 to Srece e edsin mak Network Configuration 2 147 483 647 i 65 536 Web page only Web page only aT Fixed Gateway l 2 147 483 647 to i E E O E E T Network Configuration 2 147 483 647 a 1 062 731 775 Web page only Web page only aT Fixed DNS Server 2 147 483 647 to Specify the fixed DNS server address A 2 147 483 647 4 ees eee EPa Rw controller can be browsed using this name address Device Always Name Indicates the name with which the controller can Device Configuration gt Network gt Security o oo o User Name Monitor Page Enter the Use
137. d is used only for the optional dat alogging capability The RTC does not support automatic Daylight Sav ings Time change over This must be handled manually where required Clock Time Current Time Allows entering the current Time using a 12 hour format AM PM An additional text field is supplied that allows enter ing the local time zone format such as CDT for Central Daylight Time or PST for Pacific Standard Time This field is written into each Log file to identify the time zone that the file was originated from NOTE In order to maintain clock accuracy when changing parame ters on the Clock page make sure the last change is to update the clock This will prevent inadvertently submitting a change with a time that is several seconds old Current Date Allows entering the current Date as the Day Month and Year Synchronization Time Synchronization allows the real time clock to be synchronized with an external time server and recheck it every 15 minutes This provides better than a 1 second accuracy for the log files Synchronize Clock With Time Server Yes Enable the Series PD to synchronize with a time server No Do not use time server synchronization Time Server IP Resolution Get Server from DHCP Many network configurations support time servers to maintain the correct time for all computers on the network This option allows the unit to read the time server IP address from the DHCP server The Series P
138. du canted pe eae Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 4 67 1 4 354 ae ae a ORNS agrees ere ee ten reer Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 4 67 2 4 374 ee peste Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 5 67 1 5 355 nee Him x e a Per eae ere ee Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 5 67 2 5 375 ier N ee eee Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 6 67 1 6 356 UR F A ad iia Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 6 67 2 6 376 N GAE O TE Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 7 67 1 7 357 ne pate 5 r ia ia eo Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 7 67 2 7 377 EEN EE enano Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 8 67 1 8 358 free PEE a a a i i Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 8 67 2 8 378 a EENT Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 9 67 1 9 359 rite ieee 5 a a a Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 9 67 2 9 379 ee EE E Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 10 67 1 A 360 ane ao ES Seay dade ee nD an Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 10 67 2 A 380 T sera E RE a Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 03 1 11 67 1 B 361 ee De ae een ac ee eee Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 11 67 2 B 381 manual control mode S 19 eR istic eta oer Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 03 1 12 67 1 C 362 ee E RE pi RO SEE al ad Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 12 67 2 C 382 manual control mod
139. e apse a Kto switch Loop 1 off Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 13 67 1 D 363 nT i a A il Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 13 67 2 D 383 aerate oe ee Fo switch Loop 2 off Digital Input 3 or 4 No 0 Digital Input 3 103 1 14 67 1 E 364 he alti er ee a a Configuration Yes Digital Input 4 103 2 14 67 2 E 384 Digital Set Point Loop ae Digital Input 3 or 4 Loop 1 Digital Input 3 103 1 15 67 1 F 365 Sea loop s set point is affected by the Loop 2 7 Digital Input 4 Loop 1 103 2 15 67 2 F 385 UINT R W SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 173 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type Access Digital Setpoint Set the set point that will take effect when this Digital Input 3 or 4 a a ae i ee Digital Input 3 75 000 103 1 16 67 1 10 366 367 DINT digital input is activated Configuration oe Digital Input 4 103 2 16 67 2 10 386 387 Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 Loop Settings To S o o i i y Loop Action Off 0 Select the action of the loop as Indirect heat only C Heat Indirect 1 ontrol Loop 1 or 2 i Loop 1 106 1 3 6A 1 3 653 Direct cool only or Dual Heat and Cool Configuration ee a oe Loop 2 Off 0 106 2 3 6A 2 3 773 UINT R W Bete tale Se ee Control Loop 1 or 2 oe Loop 1 m 106 1 1 6A 1 1 651 Te BEA Sago CUSE Or NEAN acl Configuration PID Loop 2 106
140. e 3 0 to 9999000 degrees or units Minute 0 Hour 1 Modbus Read write and scaling Default Off 0 778 R W 774 775 R W 1000 oy 782 783 R W 1000 776 777 R W 1000 3000 784 785 R W 1000 Oo Off 0 877 R W 100000 879 880 R W 1000 Minute 0 878 R W Watlow Series PD e Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 2 gt PID Set 1 Parameter Name and Description Loop 2 PID Crossover Source Specify to switch PID sets based on a set point or a process value Loop 2 PID Set 1 Indirect Prop Band Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 1 Indirect Integral Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat Loop 2 PID Set 1 Indirect Derivative Set the heat indirect derivative time in minutes Loop 2 PID Set 1 Indirect Dead Band Set the offset of the heat indi rect proportional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 1 Direct Prop Band Set the cool direct proportional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 1 Direct Integral Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat Loop 2 PID Set 1 Direct Derivative Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes Loop 2 PID Set 1 Direct Dead Band Set the offset of the cool direct propo
141. e Set unit value for low end of current range This setting determines range of input 0 to 20000 units 286 287 R W 1000 Fahrenheit 0 j 1120 R Celsius 1 0 0 0 0 1118 R 0 0 1 Off 0 298 R W First Order 1 100 to 60000 seconds 299 300 R W 1000 Analog Input 2 High Current Configuration Analog Scale Input 2 Set unit value for high end of current range This setting determines range of input Analog Input 2 Temperature Configuration Analog Process Value Units Input 2 Set the temperature units for thermocouple and RTD type inputs that will be displayed in the browser only Analog Input 2 Temperature Configuration Analog Process Value Precision Input 2 Set the decimal place for the input value of temperature when utilizing themocouple or RTD input that will be dis played in the browser only Analog Input 2 Filter Method Configuration Analog Set the filter method This Input 2 smoothes out a rapidly chang ing input signal Analog Input 2 Filter Time Configuration Analog Base Input 2 Set the filter time for input in seconds 9999000 to 9999000 296 297 R W degrees or units 1000 Configuration Analog Input 2 Set calibration single set point offset value This allows com pensation for lead resistance and sensor error Loop 2 Failure Latching Configuration Loop Select to latch input failure If Settings 2 a sensor fails an error is gen
142. e to change the size of the PD assembly from the standard static assembly to the dynamic assembly one would use a message instruction to accomplish this 3 1 Ladder Logic Examples In the ladder logic examples that will follow it would be good to note how the PD and its associated tags were configured First let s take a look at the tags that were created for the PD upon completion of the module configuration Bringing the focus to the screen shot below notice that the PD was given the name Watlow_PD the Comm Format was set at INT and the Static Assemblies are being used for both the input and output assemblies Figure 3 1a E Module Properties ENBT_A ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Type ETHEANE T MODULE Genernc Ethernet Module Wendor Allen Bradley Parent EME TA Connection Parameters Mame Ja tl PD C deen aia d T Assembly af ja Description Fa Instance SIZE i Input 100 22 16 bit 112 m m Output 4 06 bit Comm Forrgst a S bit Address r ieee PAddess 100 46 54 172 Eo C Host Name E AE aurana 125 Nh iis i Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Upon completion of the PD configuration the Controller Tags are automatically generated for all assemblies as can be seen in the resultant screen shot below Figure 3 16 Aw atow POC ABSETHERNET_ w allow POC Data SINT 400 Hes WFathow PD AB ETHERNET_
143. e Acknowledge Alarm parameters even though you have Switch to Digital Set Point enabled Only parameters relating to Switch to Digital Set Point have any effect on the controller If you change the function to Acknowledge Alarms those alarm related parameters previously entered are used Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD Series PD Monitor Device Tiis page was loaded from FORA on Thn Sep 18 14 59 59 J003 Trend Infomation Funchen Switch To Digtal Set Pont lt ___ _ Dew ec in formation Jichve State LowFalling adga a ee 2 SDevee Configuraton o Acknowledge Alarm An bg ipui Al arm Acioun Sonca C q Ammog ipur Wch Aleme M Alar 1 Pm hirm Ehana ir a gt 7 F Alem 3 M Alem 4 ET i d d A H Coina Lot genh ie Am 3 E Alarm 6 E Crt Wo Alami Alem amp HA Soe E Nanon Switch to Manual Control E abay is sigh it HH eae Sateen Pi Wch Le orp F Loop E LDG i xj 5 Cadira Switeh Control Loop OTT Which Loopa E Loep F Lopi d _ s sF5 Ba sj ar Ges Digital Set Point Which Loop lop 1 u 7 Best View la IE E MNT co Digal Set Pont pD c q B hioi 1 0 2 Submit Pagal Figure 31 Digital Input Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 31 Chapter 7 Configura
144. e Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt PID Parameters gt PID Set 1 Derivative Heat Indirect or PID Set 1 Deriva tive Cool Direct Enter a value for Derivative and click the Submit button to send the new value Reduced Overshoot Set Point Proportional Band Proportional Band x 2 Heating Slows Temperature Time Watlow Series PD 134 Chapter 10 Features Dead Band In heat cool PID applications a dead band above and below the set point can save energy and equipment wear by maintaining process temperature within acceptable ranges Shifting the effective cooling set point and heating set point keeps the two systems from fighting each other Proportional action ceases when the process value is within the dead band Integral action continues to bring the process temperature to the set point When the dead band value is zero the heating element activates when the temperature drops below the set point and the cool ing element switches on when the temperature exceeds the set point To view or change the Dead Band go to Device Con figuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt PID Parameters gt PID Set 1 Dead Band Heat Indirect or PID Set 1 Dead Band Cool Di rect Enter a value for Dead Band and click the Submit button to send the new value Cooling Proportional Band Cooling Set Point Heating Set Point OMAN
145. e cool direct output power Monitor Device Bae tO 10 900 010 10 000 100 Loop 2 101 1 46 65 1 2E 98 lt Auto Set Point Loop 1 101 1 32 65 1 20 76 77 Set the closed loop auto setpoint for control loop 1000 75000 101 1 40 65 1 28 90 91 DINT Manual Set Point l l l Loop 1 101 1 31 ae 75 manual mode Mode Off 0 y Loop 1 101 1 34 a 80 control E e Tuning Status Control Loop Status Loop 101 1 35 65 1 23 SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 169 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default ___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type _ Access Alarm Status Indicates the status of the Alarm Inactive or Off 0 Active 1 Silenced 2 Monitor Device Latching Action Select to clear a latched alarm after the process value returns to normal Monitor Device Silence Action Select to silence an alarm Monitor Device Analog Input 1 or 2 Filtered Process Value Indicates the filtered process value measured by the corresponding analog input Analog Input 1 or 2 Process Value Monitor Device CT Input 3 or 4 Filtered Process Value Indicates the filtered process value measured by wontrdevee fo the corresponding analog input CT Input 3 or 4 Process Value Indicates the unfiltered process value measured b Monitor Device the corresponding analog input Alarm Latching Silence Action Set the coresponding bit
146. e crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the temperature devi ates from the controlled set point by the alarm deviation set point Alarm 5 Process Alarm Monitor Device Source Configuration Alarm 5 Select input where this alarm gets the information for com parison to the alarm set point Alarm 5 Process Alarm Monitor Device Set Point Trend Information Set the alarm process set Configuration Alarm 5 point in absolute degrees or units Alarm 5 Deviation From Configuration Alarm 5 Source Select control loop where this alarm gets the control set point for comparison to the alarm set point Alarm 5 Deviation Alarm Monitor Device Set Point Trend Information Set the alarm deviation set Configuration Alarm 5 point in degrees or units from set point Off 0 Process Value 3 2 Process Value 4 3 Configuration Alarm 5 Select source of current trans former measurement to gener ate Alarm 5 Alarm 5 CT Alarm Set Point Configuration Alarm 5 Enter current transformer set point for Alarm 5 to activate Watlow Series PD 108 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Alarm 5 Send Email Enable Select to enable an email to be sent on activation of Alarm 5 Alarm 5 Email Alert Subject Enter subject of email for Alarm 5 This message will appear in the subject line of the sent email Alarm 5 Alarm Hysteresis Select hysteresis value
147. e digital inputs can be assigned to e Switch to another set point for Loop 1 or Loop 2 e Acknowledge latched alarms e Switch to manual mode operation e Switch a control loop off e Pause datalogging All of these functions are level triggered except acknowledge latched alarms which is edge triggered For level triggered a low or high state will trigger an event for as long as that state exists For edge triggered a rising or falling edge will trigger an event To enable a digital input go to Device Configura tion gt Inputs gt Digital Input 3 or 4 gt Function and select the the action to take based upon the digital in put status To configure the CT input go to Device Configura tion gt Inputs gt Digital Input 3 or 4 Select configura tion parameters to match your application require ments To monitor Digital Input Status go to Monitor De vice gt Input Status gt Input 3 or 4 Value and Sta tus This indicates if the event is active and what digi tal input function is selected Watlow Series PD 132 Control Methods Output Configuration Each controller output can be assigned to a Control Loop and configured as a heat output a cool output an event alarm output or off disabled No dependency lim itations have been placed on the available combinations The outputs can be configured in any combination For instance all outputs could be set to cool Analog outputs can be scaled for any desired curr
148. e this alarm gets the information for com parison to the alarm set point Alarm 7 Process Alarm Set Point Set the alarm process set point in absolute degrees or units Alarm 7 Deviation From Source Select control loop where this alarm gets the control set point for comparison to the alarm set point Alarm 7 Deviation Alarm Set Point Set the alarm deviation set point in degrees or units from set point Alarm 7 CT Measurement Source Select source of current trans former measurement to gener ate Alarm 7 Alarm 7 CT Alarm Set Point Enter current transformer set point for Alarm 7 to activate Web Page Your Range Default Modbus Settings Read write and scaling __ Monitor Device Inactive 0 181 R Active 1 Silenced 2 Trend Information Inactive 0 Off 0 Loop 1 0 Off 0 Low Process 1 High Process 2 Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 7 184 185 R W 1000 182 183 R W 1000 186 187 R W 1000 Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 1 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 7 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 7 Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Configuration Alarm 7 2000000200 to 2000000200 degrees or units Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 7 Off 0
149. ecimal places Loop 2 Manual Set Point Monitor Device Display the open loop manu Trend Information al set point for control loop Off 0 Heat Indirect 1 Cool Direct 2 Loop 2 Loop Action Configuration Loop Select the action of the Loop as Settings 2 Indirect heat only Direct cool only or Dual heat cool 3 On Off 0 PID 1 Loop 2 Loop Indirect Heat Configuration Loop Algorithm Settings 2 Select method of control algo rithm used for Indirect Heat for Loop 2 On Off 0 PID 1 Loop 2 Loop Direct Cool Configuration Loop Algorithm Settings 2 Select method of control algo rithm used for Direct Cool for Loop 2 g g J J s Heat Cool Indirect Direct Default Modbus Read write and scaling 97 R 100 98 R 100 92 93 R 1000 75000 75000 90 91 R W 1000 i o R W 100 i Watlow Series PD 83 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Web Page Your Settings Loop 2 Transition from Auto Mode to Select outputs action when transitioning from Auto closed loop to Manual open loop mode Loop 2 Closed Loop Limit Low Set Point Set the minimum Auto closed loop set point allowed by operator Loop 2 Closed Loop Limit High Set Point Set the maximum Auto closed loop set point allowed by operator Loop 2 On Off Indi
150. ections are consistent with your application inputs outputs alarms limits etc If the problem persists you can get technical assistance from your local Watlow representative see back cover by e mailing your questions to wintechsupport wat low com or by dialing 1 507 494 5656 between 7 a m and 5 p m Central Standard Time CST Ask for for an Applications Engineer Please have the following information available when calling e Complete model number e All Series PD configuration information e Quick Start Guide or User s Manual e Computer Hardware Software Configuration Warranty The Series PD is manufactured by ISO 9001 registered processes and is backed by a three year warranty Return Material Authorization RMA 1 Call Watlow Customer Service 507 454 5300 for a Return Material Authorization RMA number before returning any item for repair We need this information e Ship to address Bill to address e Contact name Phone number e Method of return shipment Your P O number e Detailed description of the problem Any special instructions e Name and phone number of person returning the product 2 Prior approval and an RMA number from the Customer Service Department is needed when returning any unused product for credit Make sure the RMA number is on the outside of the carton and on all paperwork returned Ship on a Freight Prepaid basis 3 After we receive your return we will examine the unit and
151. ed an IP address Flashing Green No connections the network status indicator shall be flashing green If the device has at least one established connection even to the Message Router the network status indicator shall be steady green Steady Green Connected If one or more of the connections in which this Sennecian device is the target has timed Flashing Red timeout out the network status indicator shall be flashing red This shall be left only if all timed out connections are reestablished or if the device Is reset If the device has detected that its IP address Is already in use the network PEEP PUPICAIGSE status indicator shall be steady red While the device is performing its power up testing the network status indicator shall be flashing green red Flashing Green Red Self test 3 0 Communications between ControlLogix amp PD After configuration of the PD both real time I O connections implicit messaging and non time critical explicit messaging communications are enabled All information transferred between the control and the PD will be achieved through either the Static or Dynamic assemblies described above All implicit messages are sent and received cyclically at the rate of the Requested Packet Interval RPI where explicit messages are typically initiated via a message instruction in the control program Generally speaking explicit messages are used as a tool for configuration As an exampl
152. ent range between 0 and 20 mA or voltage range between 0 to 10V The ranges can be reversed to high to low for re verse acting devices Heat and cool outputs use the Control Loop Set Point and Control Loop page parameters to determine the output value All heat and cool outputs for each loop use the same set point value Heat and cool each have their own set of control parameters All heat outputs for each loop use the same set of heat control parameters and all cool outputs for each loop use the same set of cool output parameters Each alarm output has its own set of configuration parameters and set points An event alarm can be as signed to any active analog input allowing independent operation Auto closed loop and Manual open loop Control The Series PD has two basic modes of operation auto mode and manual mode Auto mode allows the controller to decide whether to perform closed loop control or to fol low the settings of the Input Failure Parameter setting The manual mode only allows open loop control The Se ries PD controller is normally used in the auto mode The manual mode is usually only used for specialty ap plications or for troubleshooting Manual mode is open loop control that allows the user to directly set the power level to the controller s output load No adjustments of the output power level occur based on temperature or auto set point in this mode In auto mode the controller monitors the input to d
153. er set point and the mode of operation auto or manual Select the parameter value you want to change by clicking on it enter the new parameter value and click the Submit button This sends the Series PD the new value and refreshes the Monitor Device page Note Information on the Monitor Device page including alarms and errors is automatically refreshed once per sec ond if your browser supports Java Virtual Machine and is enabled to allow Java applets to run Network Services The Series PD supports DHCP client Auto IP and Static IP for address assignment Normally you will not need to make any changes The user is able to configure preferences as to which services are used if available Intelligence is employed within the Series PD to revert to backup IP assignment methods if the primary method is unavailable It will try DHCP first then Auto IP to assign an IP address This is the same method that a Windows based computer uses to get an IP address When using Auto IP the Series PD starts with the IP address 169 254 10 10 If this address is already in use it will randomly attempt other addresses in the 169 254 XX XX subnet As with any IP networking device the IP address assigned to the Series PD must be compatible with the network it is physically con nected to Note If you are using Auto IP it may take several minutes for both the Series PD and your computer to get their IP addresses The Series PD does support DNS client and Net
154. erval In this case the data type is defined as an INT so the source length is two bytes As in the configuration above to complete the configuration click on the communication tab and define the path to the PD When the tag named Data_Log_ Write is enabled the new logging interval will be sent out to the PD Figure 3 1 2b Data Log Write DL irte Enable F fons 5G Type CIP Generic Message control W y Message Configuration MSG1 Configuration Communication Tag l Message Type CIF Generic i Set Attribute Single Source Element Mew _D ata Log_Inter ype Source Length 2 Bytes Service Code 1 0 Hex Class Eb H e es ory Instance j Attribute 16 Hes We Tees D Enable Co Enable aiting D Start Done Done Length 3 D Error Code Extended Error Code Timed Out Error Path Error T est cancel_ He Changing the Assembly Size The assembly object within the PD was built in such a way that there is a Static Assembly which cannot be changed and a Dynamic Assembly which can be built by the user The Dynamic Assembly input or output becomes available along with the Static Assembly only after the size has been changed Note Implicit messaging should be and must be disabled when changing the size of either assembly Failure to do so will generate errors 165 Related to the note above go to the PD Module Property page and check Inhibit Module as shown below Figure 4
155. erver Name field the Series PD will attempt to resolve the server name through the DNS Domain Name Server to obtain the correct IP address This type of IP resolu tion is useful in case the IP address of the SMTP server should ever change Fixed Server Address The Series PD will use the IP address in the SMTP Fixed Server Address field to send the email notifica tion messages Source Email Address This field must contain a valid email address to act as the source address or reply email address for the email system The Series PD can only send email mes sages not receive them Email Recipient 1 2 3 and 4 Enter valid email addresses that you want notified if an alarm occurs or there are datalog file problems Send Email Once the entries are submitted and the server name is resolved with the DNS clicking the Static informa tion Click here to refresh page button will show an other button Send Email Click this button to send a test email to all valid email addresses entered Watlow Series PD 138 Chapter 10 Features Datalogging Settings The datalogging option allows the Series PD to record the selected control values to a text file that can be used as future reference data from the control Each text file has a unique name that identifies the file start date and time If the file is transferred to a TFTP Triv ial File Transfer Protocol server the unit name is also used to further identify the fi
156. es the output will cycle De creasing hysteresis improves controllability With hys teresis set to 1 the process value would stay closer to Watlow Series SD 133 the auto set point but the output would switch on and off more frequently and may result in the output chat tering To select On off control go to Device Configura tion gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt Loop Heat Algorithm or Loop Cool Algorithm and select On Off To adjust the hysteresis go to Device Configura tion gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt On Off Parameters gt Heat Indirect or Cool Di rect Enter a value for hysteresis and click the Submit button to send the new value NOTE Input Error Failure Parameters have no effect in on off control mode The control outputs go off e N Process Temperature The heating action switches off when the process temperature rises above the set point Set Point Temperature Hysteresis The heating action switches on when the process temperature The heating action drops below the set point minus the hysteresis switches on at startup Time The cooling action switches on when the process temperature rises above the set point plus the hysteresis ae The cooling action Hysteresis Set Point Y switches on at startup The cooling action switches off when the process temperature drops
157. etermine if closed loop control is possible The con troller checks to make certain a functioning sensor is providing a valid input signal If a valid input signal is present the controller will perform closed loop control Closed loop control uses a process sensor to determine the difference between the process value and the auto set point Then the controller applies power to a control output load to reduce that difference If a valid input signal is not present the controller will indicate an input status error at Monitor Device gt Input Status gt Status The input number will also be highlighted with a red box Chapter 10 Features To set the input error failure mode go to Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt Input Failure Parameters These settings determine controller operation in the event of a sensor failure You can choose to have the controller perform a bumpless transfer switch power to output a preset manual power level or turn the output power off Bumpless transfer will allow the controller to trans fer to the manual mode using the last power value cal culated in the auto mode if the process was stable ata 5 percent output power level for two minutes prior to sensor failure and the power level is less than 75 per cent Actual Temperature x Sensor Break Temperature 100 Output Power a lt 2 minutes Locks in Output Power Powe
158. evice Configuration gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Gen eral Alarm Settings gt Latching To enable latching select On and click the Submit button to send the new value To clear a Latched Alarm once the process has re turned to a safe condition go to Monitor Device gt Alarm Status gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Latch ing Click the Acknowledge link to clear the latched alarm The alarm state begins when the temperature reaches the Alarm High Set Point Alarm High J Set Point Y Alarm Hysteresis Normal Operating Range The alarm state continues until the temperature drops to the Alarm High Set Point minus the hysteresis A latching alarm could be turned off by A the operator at this point A non en Low latehing alarm would turn off Set Point Temperature Process Temperature automatically Time Chapter 10 Features Alarm Blocking Alarm blocking is often used to allow a system to warm up after it has been started up With alarm block ing on a low alarm is not triggered when the process temperature is initially lower than the alarm low set point The process temperature has to enter the normal operating range beyond the hysteresis zone to activate the alarm function If the Series PD has an output that is functioning as a deviation alarm the alarm is blocked when the set point is changed until the process value re enters the normal operating range To
159. fields allow entering the number of Seconds or Minutes Watlow Series PD 139 A standard dual input Series PD logging both in puts setpoints and loop power will fill the file system 10 files 190K per file in less than 24 hours Increasing the interval will allow the system to capture data for a longer period of time but may miss important data be tween data capture intervals Logging Data Compression Yes Enables Data Compression which will not enter a value in the log text file for any data that is identical to the previous log data The File System has a fixed file size of approximate ly 190k bytes per file and a maximum of 10 files With data compression enabled duplicate data is not written to the files allowing more data to be written into each file No Disables Data Compression which will enter a value in the log text file for all data points This may be desir able when the text files are exported to a spreadsheet application like Microsoft Excel to evaluate or manipu late the data When Log File is Full Overwrite Oldest Data The File System has a fixed file size of approximate ly 190k bytes per file and a maximum of 10 files Once the 10th file has been created and filled the system will automatically delete the oldest log file Log files that have not been backed up using the TFTP server or saved manually will be lost Stop Logging When the File System storage is full the logging will stop
160. figuration Alarm 3 Select hysteresis value Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can clear Alarm 3 Latching Enable Configuration Alarm 3 Select to enable alarm to be latched Latched alarms must be manually cleared when the process returns to a safe value Alarm 8 Silencing Enable Configuration Alarm 3 Select to enable alarm silenc ing Silencing allows the oper ator to disable alarm while the controller is in an alarm state Alarm 3 Silence Action Monitor Device Select to cause an active alarm to silence if silencing is enabled Alarm 8 Blocking Configuration Alarm 3 Select to prevent a low alarm from triggering when the process temperature is initial ly lower than the alarm set point due to Power On or Set Point change Also applies to high alarms Alarm 8 Latching Action Monitor Device Select to cause an active alarm to clear if latching is enabled and the process returns to a safe value Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 4 Parameter Name and Description Alarm 4 Status Display status of Alarm 4 Alarm 4 Type Select alarm type A process alarm responds when the tem perature crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the temperature devi ates from the controlled set point by the alarm deviation set point Alarm 4 Process Alarm Source Select input where this alarm gets the informa
161. ge Tag CT Input Configuration Parameters CT Input 1 Function Current Transformer Parameters 2 M i Offsets 9 CT Precision CT Units Low CT Scale High CT Scale Low Current Scale High Current Scale Output Single Offset Value Figure 34 CT Input Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD Parameter Description Turn the CT input on or off Selects the decimal position for the CT input 0 0 0 0 00 or 0 000 Selects the CT units label displayed on the web page Up to four alphanumeric characters 30000 to 30000 Sets the high value displayed with the maximum input signal 30000 to 30000 Sets the minimum input signal value from the CT 0 0 to 50 0 Sets the low value displayed with the minimum input signal Sets the maximum input signal value from the CT 0 0 to 50 0 Selects the output being monitored by the CT Any output type except a process output can be assigned to a CT input Mimimum on time required for valid CT readings See Features chapter Sets the offset value for the CT input signal 9999 to 9999 34 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Control Loops The Control Loops folder contains folders and links for configuring the control loops installed in the Series PD The controller leaves the factory with default settings on the Loop Setting page that disable all output functions To get the Series PD operational you must go through the Loop Settings links a
162. ges The Device Information page is a read only page e Administration Full read write access to all pages The Device Information page is a read only page Accessing any level except no security requires the user to login The Monitor Configuration and Administra tion security levels each have independent user names and passwords The default user name and password for all three levels is user name new password user The login screen contains a check box to save your password in your password list If you check this box you will only need to enter this information once If you close the browser you will be required to enter this information again An incorrect or cancelled login attempt will also require the user to type in the correct information again Note Be sure to change the default user names and passwords if device security is important in your application Note You must click Submit for each security level to send the new user name and password information to the Series PD LF p eee T T r Drs page war beed fom POOODIG7 on Wad Oct Or JIoJ4 56 200 Trend Information i cecumiy Level User Hame Password Re Enter Password Device Information 4 lt Monitor few r E E Suber Alinir Conliparitai 7 onl eer aon rem Submin Sapun 3 Administration ne p Subm HC Loops A A Oaeruds Bl Serre El Mateos TEPIP Setter Eras Secu A Sori BA foe Jester DD inate Beri Temei ib E a HH Toe an Lr
163. gle cycle vari able time base output function Watlow Series PD Figure 13a Output 1 Mechanical Relay PD__ J__ _ __ e Form A contact e 2 A resistive e 125 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive e 240V ac maximum e 30V dc maximum e See Quencharc note e For use with ac or dc e Minimum load current 10 mA e Output does not supply power I I 114 COM I 115 N O E I I I Internal Circuitry il Figure 13b Output 1 Solid state Relay PD__ K___ ____ e Form A contact e 0 5 A resistive e 20 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive e 24 to 240V ac e See Quencharc note e Minimum load current 10 mA e Maximum leakage current 100 pA e Not for use with direct current dc e Output does not supply power Solid state Relay Solid state Switch 114 COM 115 N O I 14 com 15 normally open Figure 13c Output 1 Switched DC PD__ C___ ____ e Supply current 30 mA dc maximum e Supply voltage 24V dc e Not recommended for switching mechanical relays e Output supplies power Switched DC ee Se Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Quencharc Note
164. h To Configuration Digital Manual Loop 1 Input 3 Select to use Digital Input 3 to switch Loop 1 to manual mode of control Digital Input 3 Switch To Configuration Digital Manual Loop 2 Input 3 Select to use Digital Input 3 to switch Loop 2 to manual mode of control Digital Input 3 Switch Control Loop 1 Off Select to use Digital Input 3 to switch control Loop 1 off Configuration Digital Input 3 Select to use Digital Input 3 to switch control Loop 2 off Digital Input 3 Digital Set Configuration Digital Point Input 3 Specify Digital Set Point value to switch to when Digital In put 3 is activated Parameter Name and Description Web Page Digital Input 4 Function Set function for Digital Input 4 Digital Input 4 Active State Set level when Digital Input 4 is active Digital Input 4 State Display state of Digital Input 4 Digital Input 4 Acknowledge Alarm Action Specify action when Digital Input 4 is used to acknowl edge an alarm Digital Input 4 Select Acknowledge Alarm 1 Select to use Digital Input 4 to acknowledge Alarm 1 Select to use Digital Input 4 to acknowledge Alarm 2 Select to use Digital Input 4 to acknowledge Alarm 38 Digital Input 4 Select Acknowledge Alarm 4 Select to use Digital Input 4 to acknowledge Alarm 4 Select to use Digital Input 4 to acknowledge Alarm 5 Select to use Digital Input 4 to acknowledge Alarm 6 Co
165. herNet IP Addressing Information rev c 18 Sz Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default ___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type _ Access T gt O Dynamic Assembly Point 1 to 10 Point 1 109 1 1 6D 1 1 Read or write the class instance and attribute for Point 2 109 2 1 6D 2 1 each additional T gt O assembly point Point 3 109 3 1 6D 3 1 Point 4 109 4 1 6D 4 1 Point 5 109 5 1 STRUCT of 0 to 2 147 483 647 6D 5 1 USINT 3 Class Instance and Point 7 109 7 1 6D 7 1 Atttribute Point 8 109 8 1 6D 8 1 Point 9 109 9 1 6D 9 1 Point 10 109 10 1 6D A 1 T gt O Assembly Size in Bytes Vendor ID Point 6 109 6 1 6D 6 1 SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 186
166. hould be disabled Go to Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt Control Loop Action and set to Off Equipment Required e 41 2 digit millivolt meter e 41 2 digit milliammeter e Precision millivolt source 0 to 50 mV minimum range 0 002 mV resolution e Precision current source 0 to 20 mA range with 0 01 mA resolution e 1 KQ decade box with 0 019 resolution Calibrate Analog Input x 1 or 2 1 O COND OK W WD m e e pe wU Ne 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2l Select Calibrate Analog Input x Select Millivolts Low 5 mV Connect appropriate value to input terminals See Chapter 2 for wiring Measure value to 3 decimal places and enter value in box Click on the Calibrate button Select Millivolts High 20 mV Repeat steps 3 through 5 Select Ohms Low 90 85 Ohms Repeat steps 3 through 5 Select Ohms High 846 66 Ohms Repeat steps 3 through 5 Select Milliamps Low 0 mA Repeat steps 3 through 5 Select Milliiamps High 15 mA Repeat steps 3 through 5 Select Volts Low 0 V Repeat steps 3 through 5 Select Volts High 10 0 V Repeat steps 3 through 5 Select Go Back To Calibration Page Verify calibration and rewire for operation Watlow Series PD 60 Chapter 8 Calibration Page Calibrate Analog Output x 1 or 3 To reach the Calibration web page go to Device Configuration gt Calibration The Enter Network
167. hronization and control was required As time evolved the scope of the requirements for industrial communications broadened and became better defined with specific needs being addressed as they related to industrial communications Most notably those requirements and specifications revolved around the collection of data configuration of the control and controlled devices and the control of the process Over the years there have been many industrial protocols developed some being proprietary and some open where few if any met all three of these requirements Today with the introduction of EtherNet IP Industrial Protocol it can be said that a user can collect configure and control using one protocol Ethernet IP is a network communication standard capable of handling large amounts of data at soeeds of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and at up to 1500 bytes per packet The specification uses an open protocol at the application layer EtherNet IP makes use of the standard off the shelf Ethernet chip sets and the currently installed physical media hardware connections and incorporates what is known today as the Common Industrial Protocol CIP an open protocol at the application layer fully managed by Open DeviceNet Vendors Association ODVA hitp www odva org CIP is the critical component providing the ability to collect configure and control utilizing both implicit messaging real time I O messaging and explicit messaging information configuration
168. ice 1 8 Clear Entire File System 9 Upload Files Parameter Description Check box to select files for deletion from on board file storage Displays datalog files currently in Series PD file storage SDO The file name contains the date and time the datalog file was started The maximum file size is 190k bytes with a maximum of 10 files If column is blank the datalog file is closed and can be opened or deleted If Create Append appears data is being written to the file and the file cannot be opened or deleted until the file is closed Click this button to delete selected datalog files Displays files currently in Series PD file storage SD1 Use this location to store any type of files For example system wiring dia grams operating instructions cascade style sheets custom logos contact information links to web sites etc The maximum file size is 21k bytes with a maximum of 10 files Files with htm or html extensions create a link in the lower sec tion of the web page Naviagation Frame Click on this link to open the file in the browser window Click this button to delete selected files Send files to SD1 storage Browse to select the file to load to the Series PD and click Upload A pop up window indicates the file Click this button to delete all datalog files transfer is in process and confirms the transfer is complete Figure 56 File Manager Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 56 Chapter 7 C
169. imum Output 4 High Power Scale 0 to 10000 Set unit value for high power scale This setting is the process power value when the analog output is at maximum Configuration Output 4 two decimal places Inactive 0 Active 1 Monitor Device Output 4 State Display state of output Output 4 Output Direction Configuration Output 4 Off 0 Select whether the output will be for heating reverse action or cooling direct action Heat Indirect 1 Cool Direct 2 AND 0 OR 1 Output 4 Logic Operator Configuration Output 4 Select logic operation for event output eS Default Modbus Read write and scaling 501 R W 502 R W 10 10 0 seconds for mechanical relay output 519 520 R W 100 521 522 R W 100 Inactive 0 507 R Watlow Series PD 98 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling Output 4 Output Source Configuration Output 4 No 0 No 0 510 R W Alarm 1 Yes 1 Set to enable Alarm 1 source Output 4 Output Source No 0 No 0 511 R W Alarm 2 Yes 1 Set to enable Alarm 2 source Output 4 Output Source Configuration Output 4 No 0 No 0 512 R W Alarm 3 Yes 1 Set to enable Alarm 3 source Output 4 Output Source No 0 No 0 513 R W Alarm 4 Yes 1 Set to enable Alarm 4 source Output 4 Ou
170. is enabled and the process returns to a safe value Alarm 4 Silencing Enable Configuration Alarm 4 Select to enable alarm silenc ing Silencing allows the oper ator to disable alarm while the controller is in an alarm state Alarm 4 Silence Action Monitor Device Select to cause an active alarm to silence if silencing is enabled Alarm 4 Blocking Configuration Alarm 4 Select to prevent a low alarm from triggering when the process temperature is initial ly lower than the alarm set point due to power on or set point change Also applies to high alarms Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 5 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Bor and L 1 Jt J d Inactive 0 Inactive 0 155 R Active 1 Silenced 2 Off 0 587 R W Low Process 1 High Process 2 Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Process Value 1 0 588 R W Process Value 2 1 30000000 to 30000000 158 159 R W degrees or units 1000 Loop 1 0 Loop 1 0 589 R W Loop 2 1 2000000200 to 2000000200 1 156 157 R W 1000 degrees or units 590 R W 30000000 to 30000000 units 160 161 R W 1000 Alarm 5 Status Monitor Device Display status of Alarm 5 Trend Information Alarm 5 Type Monitor Device Select alarm type A process Configuration Alarm 5 alarm responds when the tem peratur
171. ivative value for the cool outputs Sets the offset value of the heating proportional band from the set point Sets the offset value of the cooling proportional band from the set point Sets the process or set point value where the PID sets cross over Greater than or equal to this value activates this PID set Must be within set point range limits Figure 38 Multiple PID Loop Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 38 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Outputs The Outputs folder contains links for configuring the outputs installed in the Series PD The controller leaves the factory with default settings on the Output pages that disable all output functions To get the Series PD opera tional you must go through the Output links and set up the outputs The Outputs folder links are e Outputs 1 e Outputs 2 e Outputs 3 e Outputs 4 Process Output Configuration Page The Process Output Configuration pages set the parameters for the process outputs installed Outputs can be configured as control outputs event alarm outputs or retransmit outputs The Process Output Configuration page is shown below You can see and change all of the parameters on the Output Configuration page Only those that apply will be relevant For example you can set the Retransmit Parameters even though you have the Control Function set to Control Only parameters relating to control outputs have any effect on the controller If you change the Out
172. l direct integral in minutes per repeat 759 756 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 5 Direct Configuration Multiple 0 to 9990 minutes Derivative PID Sets 1 Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes 749 750 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 5 Direct Configuration Multiple Dead Band PID Sets 1 Set the offset of the cool di rect proportional band from set point in process units 0 to 999000 degrees or units bo N Ol Ol Watlow Series PD 82 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 2 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range and Description Settings 0 to 10000 two decimal places Loop 2 Closed Indirect Power Monitor Device Display Indirect Heat power Trend Information output for Loop 2 10000 to 0 two decimal places Monitor Device Trend Information Loop 2 Closed Direct Power Display Direct Cool power out put for Loop 2 Loop 2 Working Set Point Monitor Device Active set point Could be one of several set point sources Auto Set Point Digital Set Point or Ramp to Set Point Loop 2 Auto Set Point Monitor Device Display the closed loop auto Trend Information set point for Control Loop 2 Loop 2 Manual Auto Mode Monitor Device Transitions between open loop Trend Information manual and closed loop auto control Manual 1 Auto 2 10000 to 10000 two d
173. l model only Sets the value at which the alarm is triggered Selects the Loop the deviation set point is based on Loop 1 or Loop 2 Loop 2 available on dual channel model only Sets the value at which the alarm is triggered Selects the source of the current transformer measurement CT Input 3 or CT Input 4 Sets the value at which the alarm is triggered Selects if an email gets sent when the alarm is triggered No or Yes Sets the text message displayed in the subject line of the alarm email Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters Sets the switching differential for the alarm output Selects if alarm latching is enabled No or Yes Selects if alarm silencing is enabled No or Yes Selects if alarm blocking is enabled No or Yes Figure 44 Alarm Configuration Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 44 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Network The Network folder contains links for configuring the network settings The Network folder links are e TCP IP Settings e Email e Security Network Configuration Page The Network Configuration page provides access to important information about your network and Series PD network settings Be sure to work with your network administrator when configuring the Series PD to operate on your network Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD Series PD Monitor Device Tis pare was loaded Fom FA a on Wed Sep 24 Jae
174. lace controller with correct out puts e Configure Control Loop PID and Output e Adjust power limit or change to closed loop mode e Repair or replace controller Watlow Series PD 144 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Indication Alarm will not activate or clear Controller s process value reading is decreasing as the actual process is increasing Controller does not control close enough to set point Output cycles turns on and off too frequently Cannot access Security Mon itor Configuration or Cali bration page Process value reads incor rectly Watlow Series PD Probable Cause s e Controller is in Error condition e Alarm is in latched setting e Alarm is silenced e Incorrect configuration e Incorrect wiring e Wrong output type e Defective controller e Thermocouple is reversed wired e Analog voltage or current input scal ing is reversed e PID values incorrect e Cycle times incorrect e Heat or cooling capacity incorrectly sized for application e Incorrect sensor placement e Controller is in Manual mode open loop e Control loop action configured incor rect e Wrong control mode PID control se lected instead of ON OFF control e The cycle time is set too short e Password is enabled and incorrect password is supplied e Analog input is configured incorrectly e Thermocouple sensor shorted e Process sensor scaled incorrectly e Ca
175. le The time used for the File names is generated from the internal Real Time Clock RTC Datalogging Enabled Starts datalogging to the File System Each time datalogging is disabled then enabled and the Submit button is pressed a new datalog file is created using the current configuration parameters that are configured on the Datalogging Settings page Disabled Stops datalogging to the File System Each time datalogging is disabled and the Submit button is pressed the current datalog file is closed and all data logging activity stops Parameters To Datalog Select the parameters that you want to write to the da ta log files The more parameters you select to log the faster the log files will fill up The Series PD model number and user configuration determines what param eters appear Parameters available for logging at user defined intervals are e Process Value PV1 PV2 e Working Set Point SP1 SP2 e Loop Power PL1 PL2 e Digital Input DI3 DI4 e CT Input CT3 CT4 Alarm 1 8 Status is not logged at user defined inter vals like the parameters listed above Alarms are logged as events when they occur For details on the log data format go to File Manag er section in Features Chapter Logging Parameters Logging Interval Determines the frequency that the logging system will record the Process Values Working Setpoint Loop Power or optional Discrete or Current Transformer in put values These
176. lectable control modes e Single or dual channel universal inputs e Current transformer inputs to monitor heater cur rents e Digital inputs e Up to four programmable outputs e Update rates inputs 10Hz outputs 10Hz Operator Interface e Browser based HMI human machine interface Standard Conditions For Specifications e Ambient temperature 25 C 77 F 3 C rated line voltage 50 to 60Hz 0 to 90 RH non condensing 15 minute warm up Universal Analog Input e Sample rate 10 Hz Thermocouple e Type J K T N E C W5 D W3 PTII F R S5 B thermocouple types e gt 20 MQ input impedance e Maximum 20 Q source resistance RTD e 2 or 3 wire platinum 100 Q e DIN curve 00385 curve e 250 uA nominal RTD excitation current Process e Range selectable 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA Can reverse low and high values Thermocouple Input e Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity 0 1 of input span 1 C at standard conditions e Temperature stability 0 2 degree per degree change in ambient for J K T N E PTII 0 5 for C D R and S RTD Input e Calibration accuracy 0 1 of input range 1 C at standard conditions e Temperature stability 0 05 degree per degree change in ambient Process Input e Voltage input ranges Accuracy 10mV 1 LSD at standard conditions Temperature stability 100 ppm C maximum e Milliamp input ranges Accuracy 20uA 1 LSD at standard conditions Temperature stability
177. less than 0 C 32 F or greater than 65 C 149 F e Controller calibration is incorrect or corrupt e Defective controller e Incorrect wiring e DC voltage used with AC output e External voltage is not supplied for appropriate outputs e Wrong output choice e Incorrect configuration e Power limit is in effect or in open loop mode e Defective controller Corrective Action e Turn switch on e Replace fuse check cause of failure e Reset breaker check cause of failure e Close door e Reset limit controller e Check wiring e Verify input power e Repair or replace controller e Replace cable use straight cable for switch hub cross cable for direct con nection to PC e Replace Ethernet port on PC or switch hub e Repair or replace controller e Assign same logical address Fixed IP address may have been assigned e Ensure Microsoft Client and Netbios is loaded e Repair or replace controller e Replace sensor e Repair wiring or replace sensor e Operate controller within sensor oper ation range e Configure Analog Input to correct sensor type e Repair or replace controller e Regulate temperature in cabinet e Recalibrate controller e Repair or replace controller e Correct wiring see wiring section e K output is for AC control C amp F output is for DC control e Wire correct voltage to be controlled for appropriate output see wiring sec tion e Rep
178. libration offset is incorrect e Sensor is wired incorrectly e Controller calibration is incorrect or corrupt e Defective controller 145 Corrective Action e Determine cause of error and correct e Wait for process to return to normal and acknowledge alarm e Wait for process to return to normal and alarm will work correctly e Configure Alarm Alarm Set Point Hys teresis Silencing and Latching e Correct wiring e Replace controller with correct output type e Repair or replace controller e Check thermocouple wire for correct po larity e Configure correct scaling on Input page e Tune controller Auto Tune or Manual Tune e Set cycle time to match hardware on Control Loop e Size energy sources to match load e Place sensor in optimal location e Change to Auto mode closed loop on Monitor page e Configure Control Loop Action on Con trol Loop page e Activate ON OFF control on Output page e Increase Output Cycle Time on Out put page e Provide the correct user name and pass word e Configure control for appropriate sen sor input on Analog Input page e Repair wiring or replace sensor e Set scaling on Analog Input page e Correctly set calibration offset e Wire sensor per wiring section e Recalibrate controller e Repair or replace controller Chapter 11 Troubleshooting A Appendix Specifications 2414 Controller e Microprocessor based user se
179. line frequency If correct frequency is not detected single cycle burst firing mode not available See Features chapter Displays what output hardware is present and output configura tion information Displays control loop cool algorithm selected On Off or PID Displays control loop action heat cool heat cool or off disabled Displays control loop heat algorithm selected On Off or PID Displays the assigned Netbios name The default device name is PDXXXXXX where XXXXXX is the serial number This name can be changed on the TCP IP Settings page in the Network folder Not all computer networking configurations support Netbios names Displays the Series PD model number Displays the assigned MAC address You can also use the MAC address as another Netbios name to browse the Series PD by us ing WATXXXXXX where XXXXXX are the last six digits of the MAC address without colons Not all computer networking config urations support Netbios names Figure 26 Device Information Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 26 Chapter 6 Device Information Tag Device Information Section Description Configuration Parameters 12 Serial Number Displays the Series PD serial number 13 Date Code Displays the date the unit was manufactured The format is year week For example 345 would be 2003 45th week 14 Software Prototype Revision Displays firmware prototype revision 15 Software Released Revision Displ
180. m peered j rt Figure 49 Security Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 49 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Security Configuration Parameters Security Level 1 Monitor 2 Configuration 3 Administration Parameter Description Read Write access to the Monitor Device page The Device Informa tion page is a read only page Read write access to the Monitor Device page and all Device Con figuration pages The Device Information page is a read only page Full read write access to all pages Read write access to Monitor Device page all Device Configuration pages Web View Configura tion page Security Configuration page Network Configuration page Email Configuration page and all Calibration pages The De vice Information page is a read only page Figure 50 Security Configuration Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 50 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Datalogging The Datalogging folder contains links for configuring the datalogging functions The controller leaves the factory with datalogging disabled To get the Series PD datalogging operational you must go through the Datalogging links and set up it up The Datalogging folder links are e Settings e Clock Note Datalogging folder only appears on models with datalogging capabilities Datalog Config
181. mber of Alarms Device Information R Possible Display total number of alarms available Firmware Number of Possi Device Information R ble Control Loops Display total number of con trol loops available Firmware Number of PID Device Information R Sets Possible Display total number of PID sets available Firmware Number of PID Device Information Sets Implemented Display number of PID sets implemented 23 R Firmware Software Released Device Information 11 R Revision Identifies the software revi sion Firmware Number of Alarms Device Information 21 R Implemented Display number of alarms im plemented Firmware Number of Control Device Information 22 R Loops Display number of control loops Watlow Series PD 127 Chapter 9 Device Config Table and Description Settings Read write and scaling Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus Firmware Bit Pattern 1 Device Information Hex Value 1 R Always returns 55 hex Firmware Bit Pattern 2 Device Information Hex Value 2 R Always returns AA hex Firmware ASCII 12 Device Information String Value 3 R Always returns 12 ASCII Firmware ASCII 34 Device Information String Value 4 R Always returns 34 ASCII Firmware Save User Settings Calibration Analog No 0 1061 R W Select to save user settings to Input 1 Yes 1 EEPROM
182. minutes per repeat Loop 2 PID Set 4 Indirect Derivative Set the heat indirect deriva tive time in minutes Loop 2 PID Set 4 Indirect Dead Band Set the offset of the heat indirect proportional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 4 Direct Prop Band Set the cool direct propor tional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 4 Direct Integral Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat Loop 2 PID Set 4 Direct Derivative Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes Loop 2 PID Set 4 Direct Dead Band Set the offset of the cool direct proportional band from set point in process Set crossover value to switch from PID Set 4 to PID Set 5 Web Page Your Range Settings Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 units Configuration Multiple 0 to 99990 minutes PID Sets 2 Configuration Multiple 0 to 9990 minutes PID Sets 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 units Configuration Multiple 0 to 99990 minutes PID Sets 2 Configuration Multiple 0 to 9990 minutes PID Sets 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 erees or units 1000 to 999000 degrees or 0 to 999000 degrees or units 1000 to 999000 degrees or 0 to 999000 degrees or units 30000000 to 30000000 de Modbus Read write and scaling Default 847 848 R W 1000 8
183. n 1 N p m m S gt SMTP Server IP Resolution SMTP Server Name SMTP Server Fixed Address Source Email Address Email Recipient 1 Email Recipient 2 Email Recipient 3 Email Recipient 4 Parameter Description Selects the method of SMTP server IP address resolution Get Server IP from Server Name or Fixed Server Address Sets the SMTP server name Sets the SMTP server fixed IP address Sets the email address sending the email Sets the destination email address You may send an email to four independent email addresses Sets the destination email address You may send an email to four independent email addresses Sets the destination email address You may send an email to four independent email addresses Sets the destination email address You may send an email to four independent email addresses Figure 48 Email Configuration Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 48 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Security Configuration Page The Security Configuration page sets up four independent levels of access for the Series PD The four security levels are e No Security Read only access to the Monitor Device page The Device Information page is a read only page e Monitor Read write access to the Monitor Device page The Device Information page is a read only page e Configuration Read write access to the Monitor Device page and all Device Configuration pa
184. n 3 Watlow Series PD Set Point Change 1 109 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 6 Parameter Name and Description Alarm 6 Status Display status of Alarm 6 Alarm 6 Type Select alarm type A process alarm responds when the tem perature crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the temperature devi ates from the controlled set point by the alarm deviation set point Alarm 6 Process Alarm Source Select input where this alarm gets the information for com parison to the alarm set point Alarm 6 Process Alarm Set Point Set the alarm process set point in absolute degrees or units Alarm 6 Deviation From Source Select control loop where this alarm gets the control set point for comparison to the alarm set point Alarm 6 Deviation Alarm Set Point Set the alarm deviation set point in degrees or units from set point Alarm 6 CT Measurement Source Select source of current trans former measurement to gener ate Alarm 6 Alarm 6 CT Alarm Set Point Enter current transformer set point for Alarm 6 to activate Web Page Your Range Settings Monitor Device Trend Information Inactive 0 Active 1 Silenced 2 Off 0 Low Process 1 High Process 2 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 6 Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2
185. n Page Tag Analog Input Configuration Parameters Analog Input l Sensor Type Thermocouple Parameters 2 Thermocouple Type RTD Parameters i RTD Curve Process Parameters 4 Process Precision P Process Units 6 Low Process Scale 7 High Process Scale 8 Low Voltage Scale 9 High Voltage Scale 10 Low Current Scale 11 High Current Scale 12 Temperature Process Value Units 13 Temperature Process Value Precision Input Filtering 14 Filter Method 15 Filter Time Base Offsets 16 Single Offset Value Parameter Description Selects the analog input sensor type Off disabled thermocouple RTD voltage process current process or INFOSENSE PnP Selects the analog input thermocouple linearization Type J K B T E N C D PTH R or S Sets the RTD calibration curve DIN curve only 0 000 Selects the units label displayed on the web page Up to four al Sets the decimal position for the process input 0 0 0 0 00 or pha numeric characters Sets the low scale value for the process input signal For example if you want 4 20 mA to represent 0 to 100 RH set low process scale to 0 Sets the high scale value for the process input signal For exam ple if you want 4 20 mA to represent 0 to 100 RH set high process scale to 100 Sets the low range value for the voltage input signal For example if you need 1 5 Vdc set low voltage scale to 1
186. nalog Input 1 Filter Method Configuration Analog Set the filter method This smoothes out a rapidly changing input signal Analog Input 1 Filter Time Configuration Analog Base Input 1 Set the filter time for input in seconds Analog Input 1 Single Offset Configuration Analog Value Input 1 Set calibration single set point offset value This allows com pensation for lead resistance and sensor error Analog Input 1 Failure Monitor Device Latching Acknowledge Trend Information Allows latched inputs errors to be acknowleded and cleared if sensor is repaired Off 0 Off 0 First Order 1 100 to 60000 seconds 9999000 to 9999000 degrees or units 268 R W 269 270 R W 1000 266 267 R W 1000 38 R W Watlow Series PD 66 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Web Page Analog Input 2 Sensor Type Set the analog sensor type Analog Input 2 TC Type Set the thermocouple type Configuration Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 RTD Curve Set the RTD linearization Analog Input 2 Process Precision Set the decimal place for the input value when utilizing process type input that will be displayed in the browser only Configuration Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 Process Units Set the units for process type inputs that will be displayed in the browser only Configuration Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 Low Process Scale Set uni
187. nalog Input 1 Low Voltage Configuration Analog Scale Input 1 Set unit value for low end of voltage range This setting determines range of input 0 to 10000 units 10000 260 261 R W 1000 Configuration Analog Input 1 Set unit value for high end of voltage range This setting determines range of input 0 to 20000 units 254 255 R W 1000 Analog Input 1 Low Current Configuration Analog Scale Input 1 Set unit value for low end of current range This setting determines range of input 0 to 20000 units 256 257 R W 1000 0 0 0 0 1107 R 0 0 1 Watlow Series PD 65 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Analog Input 1 High Current Configuration Analog Scale Input 1 Set unit value for high end of current range This setting determines range of input N oe Fahrenheit 0 Celsius 1 Analog Input 1 Temperature Configuration Analog Process Value Units Input 1 Set the temperature units for thermocouple and RTD type inputs that will be displayed in the browser only Analog Input 1 Temperature Configuration Analog Process Value Precision Input 1 Set the decimal place for the input value of temperature when utilizing themocouple or RTD input that will be dis played in the browser only Parameter Name Web Page Your and Description Settings Range Default Modbus Read write and scaling A
188. nce 6 Clear Latched Alarm 7 tag_ALARM_LATCH_ACTION Instance 7 Clear Latched Alarm 8 tag _ALARM_LATCH_ACTION Instance 8 Silence Active Alarm 1 tag ALARM_SILENCE_ ACTION Instance 1 Silence Active Alarm 2 tag _ALARM_SILENCE_ ACTION Instance 2 Silence Active Alarm 3 tag _ALARM_SILENCE_ACTION Instance 3 Silence Active Alarm 5 tag_ALARM_SILENCE_ ACTION Instance 5 Silence Active Alarm 6 tag_ALARM_SILENCE_ ACTION Instance 6 Silence Active Alarm 7 tag_ALARM_SILENCE_ACTION Instance 7 Silence Active Alarm 8 tag _ALARM_SILENCE_ACTION Instance 8 ee ee ee a a a a a a A a a aa Silence Active Alarm 4 tag_ALARM_SILENCE_ ACTION Instance 4 As an example the logic below uses simple bit level instructions to pick up and annunciate the alarm 1 status in the event that it becomes active Figure 3 1 1c Alarm Status PD_T20 ALM_Status 0 Alarm Active 3 1 2 Explicit Messages Ladder Logic Examples Explicit messaging connections provide generic multi purpose communication paths between two devices These connections are often referred to as just messaging connections Explicit messages provide the typical request response oriented network communication As an example of a read 163 operation the ladder logic below along with its associated configuration screen will read the current Data Logging Interval seconds or minutes value back from the PD After entries are
189. nd set up the control loops The Loop folder links are e Loop Settings e Multiple PID Sets Note Loop 2 folder appears on dual channel models only Loop Settings The Control Loop Configuration page sets the parameters for the control loops installed The control loop func tions input failure parameters set point limits on off parameters autotune start stop PID parameters and ramp to set point settings are configured on this page You can see and change all of the parameters on the Control Loop Configuration page Only those that apply will be relevant For example you can set the On Off Hysteresis even though you have the Loop Algorithms set to PID control Only parameters relating to PID have any effect on the controller If you change the Loop Algorithm to On Off the hysteresis values previously entered are used Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD Sanit ee Ge Monitor Device Trend bnberenation live pare war dadai wom Pe an Fn Sap IF TRITA So Device Infamaa Casabal Loop sr ter tad e Loap Arini Hes fredie i aes Conipareiion p Heni direct Ai FD A IOo a er a E Chii Loar Loop Let Lerect Aerie PD F q Elfice T Domp daia npiri Fade Parameters iath FET Sede E di rs T uishinn ra ding EM J Late bey cor Loon Satter ddira F Tee Hiap FA 4 Somer FH Nery Limits FE Dhoni bbs cree BS Stet Luais eal in Ln f a Cel Pood Ch CO Faramr rr
190. nfiguration The Multiple PID Loop Configuration page allows access to all of the PID sets for each loop available You can see and change all of the parameters on the Multiple PID Loop Configuration page but only those that apply will be relevant For example you can set the Cool PID values even though the Series PD is set for heat PID control Only pa rameters relating to heat PID values have any effect on the controller If you change the Loop Action to Heat Cool the cool PID values previously entered are used Note Multiple PID Loop 2 Configuration appears on dual channel models only Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD ieee Monitor Device Trend Information Deve Infennatan SDence Conhgirahon Einpoutr EB Coat Looper Eliana J Loop Setter Mutri PT Cate Eel Fences ct E Cupo Eiyabgog Eor Stern Caibrriu Bert Viewed a E 2 HH T o kdk IH Series PD fis pace was loaded from POOO0IO7 on Mon Sep 22 OFANA et Croce Crt Shure Process Wake FU Set No 1 Prop Band c Eat Heat indirect b Cool Direct 5 Lier ihin pa mi hre F ey Cross Over Bhi ee 2c 5 Fi q PD Set No 2 Prop Band ninpral Derreatire Dead Band Pec Minutes per Repeat Minutes qa ik Heri iedreci ond Lairet ross rer Poot FID Sct Ho 3 po pa Lote peal Miuies per Repeat j Derrvatier himen Dead Band G Hemi mdrerii 12 noo boo h Coal Direct
191. nfiguration 0 to 9 990 1000 SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c pee Off 0 Startup and SP Change p 3 0 to 9 999 000 1000 100 000 Loop 2 Select the time unit that applies to the Ramp Rate Sono pop 4 one mainte x0 oes Minute 0 eerie Configuration Hour 1 Loop 2 25 000 106 1 58 6A 1 3A 106 2 58 6A 2 3A 106 1 60 6A 1 3C 106 2 60 6A 2 3C 106 1 59 6A 1 3B 106 2 59 6A 2 3B 106 1 19 6A 1 13 106 1 27 6A 1 1B 106 1 35 6A 1 23 106 1 43 6A 1 2B 106 1 51 6A 1 33 106 2 19 6A 2 13 106 2 27 6A 2 1B 106 2 35 6A 2 23 106 2 43 6A 2 2B 106 1 20 6A 1 14 106 1 28 6A 1 1C 106 1 36 6A 1 24 106 1 44 6A 1 2C 106 1 52 6A 1 34 106 2 20 6A 2 14 106 2 28 6A 2 1C 106 2 36 6A 2 24 106 2 44 6A 2 2C 106 1 21 6A 1 15 106 1 29 6A 1 1D 106 1 37 6A 1 25 106 1 45 6A 1 2D 106 1 53 6A 1 35 106 2 21 6A 2 15 106 2 29 6A 2 1D 106 2 37 6A 2 25 106 2 45 6A 2 2D 679 680 695 696 711 712 1727 128 743 744 799 800 815 816 831 832 847 848 863 864 681 682 697 698 713 714 729 730 745 746 801 802 817 818 833 834 849 850 865 866 683 684 699 700 715 716 731 732 747 748 803 804 819 820 835 836 851 852 867 868 757 D 759 760 879 880 ae 758 E nn S 106 1 13 6A 1 D 668 175 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default ___ EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data T
192. nfiguration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Configuration Digital Input 4 Your Settings Range Default Modbus Read write and scaling Off 0 Off 0 371 R W Acknowledge Alarm 1 Switch To Manual Control 2 Switch Control Loop Off 3 Digital Set Point 4 Pause Data Logging 5 False 0 False 0 372 R W True 1 Inactive 0 Inactive 0 68 R Active 1 Silence Alarm 0 Silence Alarm 388 R W Acknowledge Alarm 1 0 Silence and Acknowledge Alarm 2 No 0 No 0 373 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 374 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 375 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 376 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 377 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 378 R W Yes 1 Watlow Series PD Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Select to use Digital Input 4 to acknowledge Alarm 7 Select to use Digital Input 4 to acknowledge Alarm 8 Manual Loop 1 Select to use Digital Input 4 to switch Loop 1 to manual mode of control Digital Input 4 Switch To Manual Loop 2 Select to use Digital Input 4 to switch Loop 2 to manual mode of control Digital Input 4 Switch Con trol Loop 1 Off Select to use Digital
193. nput Configuration page Only those that apply to the sensor type selected will be relevant For example you can set all of the process parameters even though you have thermocouple enabled Only parameters relating to thermocouples have any effect on the controller If you change the sensor type to process those process parameter values previously entered are used Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD JD i maa crie 5 i eau E ae Mus pags war foeded fro PO oo Wed Sep PP ISITA DOs Trend Infopath Analog lapi Daia Information anea Type Thevecougie Heyes Conigurahan Thennecouple Parameters Elis Theastopk Typ fF H aell Azai fore j f mE LY 2 Lani digest T Dinni be i ETU Parameter CT Sexe 4 TL Sunn OI i j Blaira Ss Lys phan a Farahan dios f Brug I i f Hih IRT I j LIND i D F Caries a pez i al ETTET Me i 3 po i i I _ a ge es rere t r pan l n i j M s 11 Bari Hirwain E je bitii High Dumert Seals m Au 4 77 hikaia TH Tamparatere Froacss Valus Confeuratien Demgeniure Feier waue Urs Canan q 7 ipere Peren gue Pre Whole m E lapat Fikermg Furr l I ih I E bi o p Filter Tim Eim Fi tod i 15 OFig Suan Hani Figure 29 Analog Input Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 29 Chapter 7 Configuratio
194. ntacts Each relay output is isolated from the blocks above and is isolated from other relay outputs The model number for each output option appears with its wiring diagram Check the label on the controller and compare your model number to those shown here and to the model number breakdown in the Appendix of this manual All outputs are referenced to a de energized state All wiring and fusing must conform to the National Electric Code and to any locally applicable codes as well Figure 6a Power Wiring all model numbers e Nominal voltage 24V ac dc lt E 26 L1 24V amp ac dc oe p t 6 Chapter 2 Install and Wire AN Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Watlow Series PD Figure 7a Thermocouple Input 1 all model numbers Thermocouples are polarity sensitive The negative lead usually red must be connected to terminal 9 e Input impedance gt 20 MQ 12 INFOSENSE P DATA gt g E H si 10 a 10 D 9 gt H 9 INFOSENSE P GND Figure 70 Thermocouple Input 2 PDD Thermocouples are polarity sensitive The negative lead usually red must be connected to terminal 5 e Input impedance gt 20 MQ
195. o 0 405 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 406 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 407 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 429 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 430 R W Yes 1 Energized 0 Energized 0 1408 R W De energized 1 Output 1 Output Source Configuration Output 1 Alarm 1 Set to enable Alarm 1 source Output 1 Output Source Configuration Output 1 Alarm 2 Set to enable Alarm 2 source Output 1 Output Source Configuration Output 1 Alarm 3 Set to enable Alarm 3 source Output 1 Output Source Configuration Output 1 Alarm 4 Set to enable Alarm 4 source Output 1 Output Source Configuration Output 1 Alarm 5 Set to enable Alarm 5 source Output 1 Output Source Alarm 6 Set to enable Alarm 6 source Output 1 Output Source Configuration Output 1 Alarm 7 Set to enable Alarm 7 source Output 1 Output Source Configuration Output 1 Alarm 8 Set to enable Alarm 8 source Output 1 Output Source Digi Configuration Output 1 tal 3 Set to enable Digital Input 3 source Output 1 Output Source Digi Configuration Output 1 tal 4 Set to enable Digital Input 4 source Output 1 Output Logic Select output state in an alarm true condition Watlow Series PD 91 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling Output 1 Analog Type Configuration Output 1 Voltage 0 409 R W Select analog output type
196. o high alarms Modbus Read write and scaling Web Page Your Range Default Settings No 0 Yes 1 Configuration Alarm 1 Up to 30 alpha numeric characters Configuration Alarm 1 0 to 2000000200 degrees or 539 540 R W 1000 No 0 No 0 538 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 111 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 537 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 110 R W Yes 1 l Configuration Alarm 1 units Configuration Alarm 1 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 1 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 1 Power On 2 Set Point Change and Pow er On 3 Watlow Series PD Set Point Change 1 101 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 2 Parameter Name and Description Alarm 2 Status Display status of Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Type Select alarm type A process alarm responds when the tem perature crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the temperature devi ates from the controlled set point by the alarm deviation set point Alarm 2 Process Alarm Source Select input where this alarm gets the information for com parison to the alarm set point Alarm 2 Process Alarm Set Point Set the alarm process set point in absolute degrees or units Alarm 2 Deviation From Source Select control loop where this alarm gets the control set point for comparison to the alarm set point Alarm 2 Deviation Alarm
197. oe peared S E E 39 AlarmS ccs phen eo eB RS Aes doe AG AS Heid ak 43 Network siic o ye oe bh eee eee ee ee 45 Datalogi 625624645 eneeavereareseetaeeea 51 File System ctag sos paw dee eee eae am oe Osa es 46 55 Chapter 8 Calibration Page 0000 59 Chapter 9 Parameter Table 62 MOUIS ane bee Sh eat eee ee ee at eee ee ee 63 Control LOOpS 2625 52 eGeeuboeenemeee ou tean 76 OUUU ook cap eaied eae od pees ce etn ee wae 90 AlarmS a5 2 abbveed pa edb avenn oo etaeleaas 100 Network 222 47 t b os ht da eh enaeee ha ee a eee 116 Bire eielo ii 3 bias Beat eee eee ede 118 ParOWAle 3 tact da eh se dees pera oar ed Yea ed 122 Firmware 6 bate oe kA es oes OA ee 127 Chapter 10 Features 0 00000e 129 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 144 Appendix 6600s tose eee cee eee wee ees 146 Specifications 0 000 eee 146 Ordering Information 000005 148 Declaration of Conformity inside back cover Watlow Series PD 1 Table of Contents Overview The Series PD controller is a DIN rail mounted general purpose industrial PID temperature process controller The Series PD is available in single and dual channel versions and features an embedded web server to provide an easy to use interface for configuration and monitoring of processes The controller also features several popular communications protocols to facilitate easy integration into most existing process management
198. of the cool di rect proportional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 3 Crossover Point Set crossover value to switch from PID Set 3 to PID Set 4 Web Page Your Range Default Modbus Settings Read write and scaling 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 831 832 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 99990 minutes 833 834 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 9990 minutes 835 836 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 999000 degrees or units 829 830 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 839 840 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 99990 minutes 841 842 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 9990 minutes 843 844 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 999000 degrees or units 837 838 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units 30000000 793 794 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 N N Ol Ol Watlow Series PD Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 2 gt PID Set 4 Parameter Name and Description Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 4 Indirect Integral Set the heat indirect inte gral in
199. ol Installation Category II Pollution degree 2 Rated Voltage 24V X ac or dc Rated Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Rated Power Consumption 14VA maximum Degree of Protection IP20 Meets the essential requirements of the following European Union Directives by using the relevant standards shown below to indicate compliance 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EN 61326 1997 With A1 1998 Electrical equipment for measurement control and A2 2002 laboratory use EMC requirements Industrial Immun1 ty Class B Emissions EN 61000 4 2 1996 With A1 1998 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity EN 61000 4 3 1997 Radiated Field Immunity EN 61000 4 4 1995 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity EN 61000 4 5 1995 With A1 1996 Surge Immunity EN 61000 4 6 1996 Conducted Immunity EN 61000 4 11 1994 Voltage Dips Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Im munity EN 61000 3 2 ED 2 2000 Harmonic Current Emissions EN 61000 3 3 1995 With A1 1998 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive EN 61010 1 2001 Safety Requirements of electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Part 1 General requirements Raymond D Feller III Winona Minnesota USA Name of Authorized Representative Place of Issue General Manager November 2003 Title of Authorized Representative Date of Issue Signature of Authorized Representative 2416 How to Reach Us TOTAL CUSTOMER
200. om Loops Bapt HFb Spay Synchronization A e ii Lack Aik TF eere ma p H Tea Servo IF Forus Set Server IF From HCP Tare Server Hare 7 Trampi tame nicl gov Bari Wiesel ba EE S HH Te Tma Server Ford A direc 0 00 1 7 _ 1 1 Example 25 45 JM J HM Tit of Piccise j The bart eynchrosssstion oocused st Uedewreen When Loot Sctronced Wih ij 1 2 Figure 53 Datalog Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 53 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Clock Configuration Parameters Current Time 1 Hours Minutes Seconds A M P M Current Date 5 Month 6 Day rA Year Synchronization 8 Synchronize Clock with Time Server 9 Time Server IP Resolution 10 Time Server Name 11 Time Server Fixed Address 12 The Last Synchronization Oc curred at Parameter Description Sets the hours for the current time 1 12 hours Sets the minutes for the current time 0 60 minutes Sets the seconds for the current time 0 60 seconds Sets A M or P M for the current time Sets the month for the current date 1 12 Sets the day for the current date 1 31 Sets the year for the current date 2000 2099 Enables the Series PD to synchronize its clock with a time server No or Yes Selects the I
201. on Latching or Non latching Selects the controller s output mode upon input failure Off dis Sets the Cool output method of control PID or On Off abled Bumpless Power or Fixed Power Sets the fixed output power level for fixed output power level upon input failure 100 to 100 Sets the minimum value for auto set point adjustment Range de pends upon sensor selected Sets the maximum value for auto set point adjustment Range de pends upon sensor selected Sets the switching differential when configured as On Off method of control Sets the switching differential when configured as On Off method of control Start an autotune Sets the autotune set point as a percentage of the auto set point 50 to 150 Sets the PID capability for single or multiple PID sets Sets proportional band value for PID Set 1 Sets integral value for PID Set 1 Sets dead band value for PID Set 1 Selects the ramp to set point action for the single set point ramp function Off disabled Ramp on Power Up Ramp on Set Point Change or Ramp on Power Up and Set Point Change Sets the ramp rate for the ramp to set point function Sets the ramp rate time units for the ramp to set point function Sets derivative value for PID Set 1 Ramp time in degrees units per hour or per minute Figure 36 Control Loop Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 36 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Multiple PID Loop Co
202. on and network settings can be easily accessed from this page The time and date the page was loaded appears at the top of the page This page is not automatically refreshed The Device In formation page provides information on e Inputs e INFOSENSE Data e Outputs e Control Loops e Device Identification e Current Network Settings Note If you are going to Restore Factory Defaults or Restore User Settings we strongly recommend that you document all of your settings first Be sure to document your Current Network Setttings found at the bottom of the Device Information page Wow Ser Te i f MT ih fare Wear dedi io Oe an Tire Gee JE Po ee Trend Irslortricaliernt apote F i i brii i TICE Informai z i A 1 Ani Leer ea irga anea Lyp kammare ADewe Configuration Duptal Lepr 3 Poncia Arhaowedg Alar 3 J Higar erer Treecrmer ira 4 ST Irga Bimi Loans nirtira are H Cupi leji j mn d FA 4 dee r i A N S a G a 1 a Eiaa TOPO jtina CaipaL ote kir aurera l ee Lire PTEE Tr Pim Do Al Jary iari i ner ol FA Orbe dead 2 Ponchon ore AE Sere a ar Trei 3 p Taib i 3 J Poon Err Control Leeeges 1 B TELI _ ___ _ 6 Bhat Temmi le CE et HHE m lzan T rtz Heat nri ri 7 d MPLA lI l pi Hagi riz rikit i Ea p Tey la selin i Dener enhhicahen I Han F i Ea a mmmn c EI igre L f H E LAAJA G Li HH E 5S US Ua IF e 1 j i LETE D es 1 My Barur i j ie enaa oO 1 K Cure Hetimore eiai
203. onfiguration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 gt PID Set 2 Parameter Name Web Page and Description Loop 1 PID Set 2 Indirect Integral Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Loop 1 PID Set 2 Indirect Derivative Set the heat indirect deriva tive time in minutes Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Loop 1 PID Set 2 Indirect Dead Band Set the offset of the heat indi rect proportional band from set point in process units Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Set the cool direct proportional band from set point in process units Loop 1 PID Set 2 Direct Integral Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Loop 1 PID Set 2 Direct Derivative Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Loop 1 PID Set 2 Direct Dead Band Set the offset of the cool di rect proportional band from set point in process units Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 Loop 1 PID Set 2 Crossover Point Set crossover value to switch from PID Set 2 to PID Set 3 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Your Settings N Ol Modbus Read write and scaling Range Default 0 to 99990 minutes 697 698 R W 1000 0 to 9990 minutes 699 700 R W 1000 693 694 R W 1000 0 to 99
204. onfiguration Loop Select to latch input failure If Settings 1 a sensor fails an error is generated This selection will latch intermittent error Your Settings Modbus Read write and scaling Range Default 0 to 10000 two decimal places 10000 to 0 two decimal places Within set point limits Off 0 Manual 1 Auto 2 10000 to 10000 two decimal places Off 0 Heat Indirect 1 Cool Direct 2 Heat Cool Indirect Direct 3 On Off 0 PID 1 On Off 0 PID 1 Off 0 On 1 83 R 100 84 R 100 78 79 R 1000 75000 75000 76 77 R W 1000 o R W 100 Off 0 z E 5 wa wa Watlow Series PD or Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description Web Page Loop 1 Output Transition from Auto Mode to Select output action when transitioning from Auto closed loop to Manual open loop mode Loop 1 Failure Fixed Power Select output power level to apply if sensor on input produces errors and transition to manual open loop occurs Loop 1 Closed Loop Limit Low Set Point Set the minimum Auto closed loop set point allowed by operator Loop 1 Closed Loop Limit High Set Point Set the maximum Auto closed loop set point allowed by operator Loop 1 On Off Indirect Hys teresis Set the control switching indirect hysteresis for
205. onfiguration Page Web View Page The Web View page allows customization of the Series PD web page appearance The logo in the upper left cor ner and the name in the middle of the banner at the top of each web page can easily be customized In addition cascade style sheets can alter the web page attributes such as colors fonts text size etc Note You must click Submit to send the new information to the Series PD i UG FF ae brow F3 LONE Mormior Davies 4 fing ieee ue foadod fam AOA on gow OF Pata J00 rend liferation Curent Settings Device Information Device iiis Deno Conf Li SDlAfaejuada tasi of pe _ _ _ 1 Blevice Configure Rieu E EEES cagle Sheet wail Per cea oik sty he ei Biro Cooer Harner Capion i Ton whe Himi Hiis said EL Natwrk See ae E nb Eib Syetan Chek here to refresh banner 1 d Wab Few Chek bere to reiresh oll i hF inai fart Vened in E r HH I Dr oo Kiek Figure 57 Web View Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 57 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag 1 Figure 58 Web View Web Page Tag Descriptions Web View Parameters Logo Style Sheet Banner Caption Click here to refresh banner Click here to refresh all Watlow Series PD Parameter Description Select the file name
206. onitor Alarm 1 to 8 Configuration Deviation Alarm Set Point Set the deviation from the set point that will trigger an alarm Alarm 1 to 8 Configuration SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Energized 0 De Energized 1 Inactive 0 Active 1 Off 0 Low Process 1 High Process 2 Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 1 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 1000 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 1000 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 Alarm 7 Alarm 8 And 0 Energized 0 Inactive 0 Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 1 to 8 Process Value 1 0 Loop 1 0 Addressing Information rev c 104 2 7 68 2 7 104 3 7 68 3 7 104 1 18 68 1 12 104 2 18 68 2 12 104 3 18 68 3 12 104 1 5 68 1 5 104 2 5 68 2 5 104 3 5 68 3 5 105 1 1 69 1 1 105 2 1 69 2 1 105 3 1 69 3 1 105 4 1 69 4 1 105 5 1 69 5 1 105 6 1 69 6 1 105 7 1 69 7 1 105 8 1 69 8 1 105 1 2 69 1 2 105 2 2 69
207. ontain a navigation frame that looks and operates much like Windows Explorer This frame does not change as web pages are accessed and changed The navigation area contains folders and web page links A plus sign in front of a folder indicates the folder can be expanded to show more information A minus sign in front of a folder indicates the folder can be contracted to show less information For example if you click on the sign in front of the Device Configu ration folder or click on the Device Configuration folder itself you ex pand the Device Configuration folder The folders that appear contain additional folders as indicated by the sign in front of each folder Click on the or sign in front of any folder or click on the folder itself to ex pand or contract that folder When you see page links underlined text you can click on a link to take you to a specific Series PD web page For example with the Inputs folder expanded click on the Analog Input 1 link to go to the Analog In put 1 Configuration page Figure 23 Navigation Frame Example Watlow Series PD 23 I now Monitor Device B Control Loopt B Neiro 2 eae Alarn GIF System Alarm Caltrahon a D w 28 onnectivily Gress Chapter 5 Monitor Device Page Tag Monitor Device Page Parameters Parameter Description 1 Te gt pi S gt a pi y pi 17 ag eg a i oe Input St
208. oop 2 Set 1 Loop 2 Set 2 Loop 2 Set 3 Loop 2 Set 4 106 1 26 106 1 34 106 1 42 106 1 50 106 2 18 106 2 26 106 2 34 106 2 42 106 1 23 106 1 31 106 1 39 106 1 47 106 1 47 106 2 23 106 2 31 106 2 39 106 2 47 106 1 24 106 1 32 106 1 40 106 1 48 106 1 56 106 2 24 106 2 32 106 2 40 106 2 48 106 1 25 106 1 33 106 1 41 106 1 49 106 1 57 106 2 25 106 2 33 106 2 41 106 2 49 106 1 22 106 1 30 106 1 38 106 1 46 106 1 54 106 2 22 106 2 30 106 2 38 106 2 46 mn nn OO 0 ae 6A 1 1A 6A 1 22 6A 1 2A 6A 1 32 6A 2 12 6A 2 1A 6A 2 22 6A 2 2A 6A 1 17 6A 1 1F 6A 1 27 6A 1 2F 6A 1 2F 6A 2 17 6A 2 1F 6A 2 27 6A 2 2F 6A 1 18 6A 1 20 6A 1 28 6A 1 30 6A 1 38 6A 2 18 6A 2 20 6A 2 28 6A 2 30 6A 1 19 6A 1 21 6A 1 29 6A 1 31 6A 1 39 6A 2 19 6A 2 21 6A 2 29 6A 2 31 6A 1 16 6A 1 1E 6A 1 26 6A 1 2E 6A 1 36 6A 2 16 6A 2 1E 6A 2 26 6A 2 2E 677 678 693 694 709 710 725 726 741 742 797 798 813 814 829 830 845 846 861 862 687 688 703 704 719 720 735 736 751 752 807 808 823 824 839 840 855 856 871 872 689 690 705 706 721 722 737 1738 753 754 809 810 825 826 841 842 857 858 873 874 691 692 707 708 123 724 739 740 755 756 811 812 827 828 843 844 859 860 875 876 685 686 701 702 717 718 733 734 749 750 805 806 821 822 837 838 853 854 869 870 DINT R W DINT R W DINT R W DINT R W DINT R W 106 1 14 6
209. ortioned Output Configuration Parameters Function Control Output Parameters 2 S gt s m Output Direction Loop Output Cycle Time Output Mode Time Base System Line Frequency Low Power Scale High Power Scale Event Output Parameters 9 10 11 Output Source Output Logic Output Active State Parameter Description Selects the output function Off disabled Control Event or Retransmit Selects the output direction Off disabled Heat or Cool Loop 2 available on dual channel model only Sets the time base used for fixed time base mode of operation Selects the output mode of operation Fixed time base Variable time base or Single Cycle only available with AC input power source Selects the control loop assigned to that output Loop 1 or Loop 2 Selects the line frequency of the AC input power 50 or 60 Hz Sets the minimum output power level available for the output 0 to 100 Sets the maximum output power level available for the output 0 to 100 Selects what sources are assigned as inputs to the logic function All alarm outputs and any digital inputs are available as input sources selected AND or OR logic Selects the output state when the output is active Energized or Selects the logic function applied to the alarms and digital inputs De engergized Figure 42 Time Proportioned Output Configuration Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 42 Cha
210. ovide connection points for the input power inputs and outputs These connectors are removable and each terminal position is numbered The RJ 45 connector is located on the top of the Series PD to allow connection to an Ethernet network Input and Output Connectors Bottom View Controller Power and Inout Connector Output Connector HOUOUOUUUUUO Figure 5a Input and Output Connectors Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Jumper to default IP address on power up Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Figure 5b RJ 45 Connector Watlow Series PD 5 Chapter 2 Install and Wire AN Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life A WARNING If high voltage is ap plied to the controller irre versible damage will occur Note 24 V input power re quired to use single cycle vari able time base output function Watlow Series PD Wiring the Series PD Isolation Blocks There are no electrical connections between these blocks Analog Input 1 Digital Inputs Current Transformer Inputs Analog Input 2 Control Outputs Alarm Outputs Retransmit Outputs Communications Relay outputs mechanical and solid state provide isolation through their relay co
211. p 1 PID Set 1 Crossover Point Set crossover value to switch from PID Set 1 to PID Set 2 Range Default Web Page Your Modbus Settings Read write and scaling Configuration Loop Process Value 0 668 R W Settings 1 Set Point 1 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 679 680 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 0 to 99990 minutes 681 682 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 0 to 9990 minutes 683 684 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 0 to 999000 degrees or units 677 678 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 1000 to 999000 degrees or 25000 units 687 688 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 0 to 99990 minutes 689 690 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 0 to 9990 minutes 691 692 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 0 to 999000 degrees or units 685 686 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 1 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units 30000000 669 670 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 1 N Ol Watlow Series PD Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device C
212. pear on the web pages Use the search function to find a specific parameter Modbus Read Write Status Some parameters list the read write status only no Modbus register numbers These pa rameters are available through the web pages only Modbus Registers Some parameter values are four byte integers and require two Modbus registers The low register number contains the two higher bytes and the high register number contains the two lower bytes To read 32 bit values The process value of the Series PD is contained in two registers For example register 31 contains the two high er bytes while register 32 contains the two lower bytes The 16 bit value returned from register 31 is multiplied by 65535 and added to register 32 when working in decimal format To place the decimal point divide the results by 1000 To write 32 bit values The setpoint value of the Series PD is contained in two registers For example register 76 contains the two higher bytes while register 77 contains the two lower bytes The reverse of a read has to be performed To write a setpoint of 1250 degrees which is really 1250 000 multiply the setpoint value SP by 1000 Add 65536 to negative numbers This produces the setpoint SP we want to send To determine the most significant word MSW divide the SP by 216 or 65536 To determine the least significant word LSW subtract from the SP the result of multiply ing the MSW by 216 SP 1250 1000 125
213. ppear in the subject line of the sent email Alarm 8 Alarm Hysteresis Configuration Alarm 8 Select hysteresis value Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can clear Alarm 8 Latching Enable Select to enable alarm to be latched Latched alarms must be manually cleared when the process returns to a safe value Configuration Alarm 8 Alarm 8 Latching Action Monitor Device Select to cause an active alarm to clear if latching is enabled and the process returns to a safe value Alarm 8 Silencing Enable Select to enable alarm silenc ing Silencing allows the oper ator to disable alarm while the controller is in an alarm state Configuration Alarm 8 Alarm 8 Silence Action Monitor Device Select to cause an active alarm to silence if silencing is enabled Alarm 8 Blocking Select to prevent a low alarm from triggering when the process temperature is initial ly lower than the alarm set point due to power on or set point change Also applies to high alarms Configuration Alarm 8 Range Up to 30 alpha numeric characters 0 to 2000000200 degrees or units Off 0 Set Point Change 1 Power On 2 Set Point Change and Power On 3 Default Modbus Read write and scaling 637 638 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD 115 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Network gt
214. pter 7 Configuration Page Alarms The Alarms folder contains links for configuring the eight alarms available on the Series PD The controller leaves the factory with default settings on the Alarms Configuration page that disable all alarm functions To get the Series PD alarms operational you must go through the Alarms links and set them up The Alarms folder links are e Alarm 1 thru Alarm 8 Alarm Configuration Page The Alarm Configuration pages set up the alarm functions Alarms can be configured as process deviation or current alarms The Series PD can also be configured to send out an e mail when an alarm occurs You can see and change all of the parameters on the Alarm Configuration page Only those that apply will be relevant For example you can set the Deviation Alarm Parameters even though you have the Alarm Type set to Low Process Only parameters relating to the Process Alarm have any effect on the controller If you change the Alarm Type to High Deviation the Deviation Alarm Parameters previously entered are used Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD Series PD Monitor Device Tins page was loaded rom POA on Tue Sep 29 13 3045 2003 Trend Infomation Device Information Type Dever Configuration paella Prenar Alarm Source k E Guip Process Alarm Set Pomi 5 Ap 3 BA dere priae Deviation Alarm Parameters ppr Pienahen Fom Loop 1 Set
215. public time servers will generate the output in UTC format e You can install a time server locally on your net work configured to generate your own local time This would be used specifically for maintaining time for your Series PD logging time synchronization e It may not be possible to link to a public time serv er if your network is protected by a firewall You may need to use a time server on your local network File System File Manager The on board storage is divided into two sections Storage Device 0 and Storage Device 1 Error Records Input Error state entered at the beginning of the log file or anytime an in put error occurs or clears Alarm Process Alarm Deviation Alarm or Event Alarm state is entered at the be ginning of each log file and for any time an alarm occurs is silenced acknowledged or cleared Power Power to the unit was re applied Entered only if power was applied with datalogging enabled Storage Device 0 contains only the data log files The maximum log file size is approximately 190k bytes with a 10 data log file maximum Files in Storage Device 0 can be backed up to anoth er computer either by using the TFTP functionality or by right clicking each file manually and performing a Save As function to a remote computer directory Storage Device 1 can contain any type of file The maximum file size is approximately 21k bytes each with a 10 file maximum For example this storage sec
216. put Function to Retransmit the Retransmit Parameters previously entered are used Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD Wow Series PD Momor Device ris Pum aby lowed frac TATAG aT ete kan m PRE a Trend Information Quwiput Device Information Eiir Cari 5 2 EBQence Configuration Contrel Outpat Paramet H ipar a aie i BCom lao tpt Darechen Heal iit r Laon 7 i Schaar Low Fyer Scale nw ioe E Oop Bich Dower Scale 10 Y Pee ees FF ihe i ie inser Cet T F chr Process Parameters Hl dene Annog Sigi Curent rS Fy FB Pa tenet T er iris Daha ef Tell E hi aPN Law he Sue po 1 10 fl Faot aa T Tinha es Fide fot Hagi igs cule 10 Lh e amp Ceiaten Lew Corerd orale TE _ 2 OO et G 3 Sigh Curen Sra m ni q 10 iar Tonite Bedranemil aramcters z Pacmag iha 1 n 1 1 Beart Tam be TE Pe Hi Jie El Tn ol Li ta Oe a D 12 Manis G2 A se Seale High De no m 1S Mati T i E Event Outpot Parameters Chat Son Abas A Len Alem 2 M AlN r Alem T in DE ee Lapel S pat Loge ae a i eaeecaeemesindcs 46 Aa ae i FL mE oft iEa Aci zi nee 1 7 Tuhma Reed Figure 39 Process Output Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 39 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Process Output Configuration Parameters O
217. put 2 Open Collector PD__ _C__ e Maximum current sink 200 mA dc e Maximum supply voltage 42V dc e Output does not supply power Class 2 power source required for agency compliance Open Collector 16 dc o m 17 com as 18 dc D a 15 Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Quencharc Note Switching pilot duty loads relay coils solenoids etc with the mechanical relay or solid state relay output options requires use of an R C suppressor Watlow carries the R C suppres sor Quencharc brand name which is a trademark of ITW Paktron Watlow Part No 0804 0147 0000 Note 24 V input power re quired to use single cycle vari able time base output function Watlow Series PD Figure 16a Output 3 Mechanical Relay PD__ __J_ ____ e Form A contact e 2A resistive e 125 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive e 240V ac maximum e 30V dc maximum e See Quencharc note e For use with ac or dc e Minimum load current 10 mA e Output does not supply power I I aR 20 COM E Ce i i i 20 com 21 N O X21 normally open Ss 1 Figure 16b Output 3 Solid
218. put 3 High CT Scale Configuration CT In Set unit value for high CT put 3 Input 3 scale This setting is the displayed CT value when the analog input is at maxi mum 30000000 to 30000000 units 30000000 318 319 R W 1000 0 to 50000 units 312 313 R W 1000 CT Input 3 Low Current Configuration CT Scale Input 3 Set unit value for low end of current range This setting de termines range of input 0 to 50000 units 314 315 R W 1000 Configuration CT Input 3 Set unit value for high end of current range This setting de termines range of input Configuration CT Select output CT source to Input 3 monitor Can t be used to monitor a process output F Output 1 0 Output 2 1 Output 3 2 Output 4 8 Output 2 1 1822 R W CT Input 3 Single Offset Val Configuration CT ue Input 3 Set calibration single set point offset value This allows compen sation for lead resistance and 9999000 to 9999000 units 320 321 R W 1000 sensor error N D i S Z oO 5 S amp S Oo oS pone Ner Watlow Series PD 69 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name and Description CT Input 4 Sensor Type Set the analog sensor type CT Input 4 CT Precision Set the decimal place for the input value when utilizing process type input that will be displayed in the browser only CT Input 4 CT Units Set the units for CT Input 4 that will
219. r 0 Time To determine the controller s response once a valid input signal returns to the controller go to Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt Input Failure Parameters gt Fail ure Latching If you want any input errors to latch set Failure Latching to On With this setting the con troller will continue to indicate an input error until the error is manually cleared To clear a latched error go to Monitor Device gt Process Value gt Status and click the Acknowledge button If Failure Latching is set to off the controller will automatically clear the input error change the Status back to No Fault and return to reading the tempera ture If the controller was in the auto mode when the in put error occurred it will return to auto mode and re sume closed loop control If the controller was in manu al mode when the error occurred the controller will re main in open loop control To view or change the control mode of operation go to Monitor Device gt Control Loop Status gt Mode and select Off control loop outputs disabled Manual open loop or Auto closed loop On Off Control On off control switches the output either full on or full off depending on the input auto set point and hys teresis values The hysteresis value indicates the amount the process value must deviate from the set point to turn on the output Increasing the value de creases the number of tim
220. r 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Quencharc Note Switching pilot duty loads relay coils solenoids etc with the mechanical relay or solid state relay output options requires use of an R C suppressor Watlow carries the R C suppres sor Quencharc brand name which is a trademark of ITW Paktron Watlow Part No 0804 0147 0000 Note 24 V input power re quired to use single cycle vari able time base output function Watlow Series PD Figure 15a Output 2 Solid state Relay PD__ _K e Form A contact e 0 5 A resistive e 20 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive e 24 to 240V ac e See Quencharc note e Minimum load current 10mA e Maximum leakage current 100pA e Not for use with direct current dc e Output does not supply power Solid state Relay Solid state Switch 17 COM 118 N O I o me 17 com 1 s SB 18 normaly open io Figure 15b Output 2 Switched DC PD__ _C e Maximum supply current 30 mA dc e Supply voltage 24V dc e Not recommended for switching mechanical relays e Output supplies power Switched DC gi 16 dc i B 17 com Figure 15c Out
221. r Name for password protection of Configuration Page i Calibration Page PDxxxxxx last six digits of serial number Meo Peden Wen Pade Only Web page only Web page only es Web page only Web page only a R W Web page only Web page only a _ SSS Indicates the controller s Watlow name The numbers in MAC Z O e always be accessed via NetBIOS Device Watlow Name WATaa bb cc last 3 Password Enter the Password for access to the page Monitor Page Configuration Page Calibration Page Save User Settings TE No 0 Set Yes to save user settings to the EEPROM Ca lbration Yes 1 MOS MEO OCH AD ee BAN Doo Ol E Device Type Indicates the EtherNet IP device type for the 0 to 0 1 1 2 1 1 2 UINT controller a EnerE SHORT_STRING R UDNT_ R WORD R UNT R UNT R O gt T Assembly Size in Bytes ae 110 1 1 110 2 1 110 3 1 110 4 1 6E 1 1 6E 2 1 6E 3 1 6E 4 1 STRUCT of USINT 3 Class 110 6 1 a 110 7 1 110 8 1 6E 8 1 EE E Ss 3 Ss Ee Ss E 110 9 1 6E 9 1 nr es O O O O Le er O gt T Dynamic Assembly Point 1 to 10 Read or write the class instance and attribute for each additional O gt T assembly point 0 to 2 147 483 647 110 10 1 6E A 1 6E 6 1 6E 7 1 Instance and Atttribute UINT 110 5 1 6E 5 1 Product Code Indicates the EtherNet IP product code for the controller SERIES PD with Et
222. r to remember the User Name and Password after you enter it the first time check the box Save this password in your password list If you close your browser you must re enter your user name and password information Note You must have Java Virtual Machine installed on your computer and Java must be enabled for the Monitor Device page to display properly in your browser Most browsers will already have this configured by default Series PD Monia Device OOOO Monitor Device O Z O Z O Z O Tremi Information 1 he data Bion 5 X ipui Staf Device Infonnaton BDevice Conhyguraion 2 a Ho Faut puis Cero Looms 3 Achy Daghal Inet Punches Acleowledge Alarm s SPT rad wy i pwes N i 4 4 orm E Oe Siatas f 8 9 1 0 11 2 eters Eran a or i 256 ane 3 Domb i af TA F 6 ii Pores bb g U OL Pra puis Hora inii HF Fim ae ke 4 1 5 1 T7 F i ag Pree o he Pors Bj U GU i Pra Fists Hore Teche ferrari 7 i W raf j x i I Low Prozan Acie 30 C ence Alo Acknowledes slam a0 ign 4 H H 5 Low Denson Ineciwe haa Hf Hf Bari Viewed by Se At co T Loy Alorm cire Pridi Dr A Bil ny Figure 22 Monitor Device Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 22 Chapter 5 Monitor Device Page Navigation Frame The left side of the Series PD web pages c
223. ransformer L2 3 phase current sensing up to 300 amp One Digital Input and One Current Transformer Input Digital Input 1 e Input impedance 10kQ dc only Figure 11b Voltage input 0 1V dc Event Input Low State 2 36V dc Event Input High State oo E 7 Add a 1kQ pull 2 Digital Input 1__ down resistor for g 1 Digital Common 1KO each active input Figure 11c Contact closure 0 2kQ Event Input Low State gt TKQ Event Input High State 5V dc i 10kQ Contact Closure oO 7 add a 10kQ pull A Digital Input 1 up resistor for each W 1 Digital Common f active input 11 Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Note Current transformer CT must be purchased separately Note A process output cannot be installed on Output 1 or 3 when using current transformer input Watlow Series PD Figure 12a Current Transformer Input 2 Single Phase e Input impedance 100 Vac only The current transformer must be purchased separately Watlow current transformer part number is 16 0246 up to 50 amps Systems that are more than 50 amps need an interstage transformer For example if you use a 300
224. ration Data Files logging Settings Select to clear current datalog file Parameter Name Web Page and Description Datalog Log Active Process Value 1 Specify to include Analog In put 1 Active Process in data log Configuration Data logging Settings Datalog Log Active Process Value 2 Specify to include Analog In put 2 Active Process in data log Datalog Log Active Process Value 3 Specify to include Analog In put 3 Active Process in data log Configuration Data logging Settings Datalog Log Active Process Value 4 Specify to include Analog In put 4 Active Process in data Configuration Data logging Settings Configuration Data logging Settings Specify to include Loop 1 Working Set Point in datalog Datalog Log Working Set Point 2 Specify to include Loop 2 Working Set Point in datalog Configuration Data logging Settings Datalog Log Loop Power 1 Configuration Data Specify to include Loop 1 Power logging Settings output in datalog Datalog Log Loop Power 2 Configuration Data Specify to include Loop 2 Power logging Settings output in datalog Datalog Log Alarm 1 Status Specify to include Alarm 1 Status in datalog Configuration Data logging Settings Datalog Log Alarm 2 Status Specify to include Alarm 2 Status in datalog Configuration Data logging Settings Your Settings No 0 Yes 1 No 0 No 0 1192 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0
225. rce is included in sent emails Email Email Recipient 1 to 4 Device Configuration Specify an email recipient Up to four mail boxes Network Web page only Web page only R W may receive an email Email Device Configuration gt Data Logging gt Settings C ED e mr ee CE S Enable or disable data logging Datalog Configuration Yes 1 NOXO SIN FAYN Parameters to Data Log Process Value 1 to 4 Process Value 1 Specify whether to include the corresponding l No 0 Process Value 2 process value in the datalog pate Somerton Yes 1 Process Value 3 ROO SA UN Process Value 4 Parameters to Data Log Working Set Point 1 or 2 No 0 Set Point 1 107 1 6 6B 1 6 Datal f Specify to whether to include the corresponding alaiog Soniiguration Yes 1 Set Point 2 NOM 107 1 6 6B 1 6 HAN RU set point in the datalog Parameters to Data Log Loop Power 1 or 2 Specify whether to include the corresponding No 0 Loop 1 107 1 10 6B 1 A power output in the datalog Parod Conngutation Yes 1 Loop 2 RONO 107 1 11 6B 1 B Ma PUM Parameters to Data Log Digital or CT Input Digital or CT 3 or 4 Status D No 0 Input 3 107 1 8 6B 1 8 talog Conf t a Specify whether to include the corresponding Ge sae aa Yes 1 Digital or CT moa 107 1 9 6B 1 9 WANI UWY digital input status in the datalog Input 4 SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 18 Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default __
226. re is no reason to backup the files that already exist on the TFTP server e The TFTP server does not need to be configured for out put files e The TFTP server should be configured to start automat ically any time the computer is rebooted TFTP Server IP Resolution Get Server IP from Server Name Using the Server name entered in the TF TP Server Name field the unit will attempt to resolve the server name through the DNS Domain Name Server to ob tain the correct IP address This form is useful in case the IP address of the TFTP server should ever change Fixed Server Address The Series PD will use the IP address in the TF TP Fixed Server Address field to locate the server Send Email On File Transfer Error Yes Enable the control to generate the following email message if a file transfer error occurs Device name PD000311 The datalogging TFTP server IP was unable to be resolved or the file system is full This message is generated because 1 The Series PD cannot transfer the files to the TFTP server for some reason 2 The Series PD is configured to stop logging when the file system is full No Disable sending an email for logging errors Delete All Datalog Files This command button will delete all inactive log files If logging is currently enabled the active log file will not be deleted from the File System Datalogging Clock The Clock time is generated by an internal Real Time Clock RTC an
227. rect Hys teresis Set the control switching indi rect hysteresis for On Off con trol This determines how far into the on region the input needs to move before the output turns on Loop 2 On Off Direct Hys teresis Set the control switching di rect hysteresis for On Off con trol This determines how far into the on region the input needs to move before the out put turns on Loop 2 Start Autotune Activates autotuning of PID values Loop 2 Autotune Set Point Set Autotune set point in Loop 2 PID Sets 2 Select to use single or multi ple PID Sets for Loop 2 Loop 2 Ramp Action Select the ramp to set point action for Control Loop 2 Loop 2 Ramp Rate Enter ramp to set point rate for Control Loop 2 Loop 2 Ramp Interval Select the scale of the ramp rate for Control Loop 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Range Off 0 Fixed Power 1 Bumpless Power 2 1000 to 99000 degrees or units 1000 to 99000 degrees or units No 0 Yes 1 50 to 150 Single 0 Multiple 1 Off 0 Startup 1 SP Change 2 Startup and SP Chang
228. ries PD Once data is deleted it cannot be recovered To delete all stored files click on Clear Entire File System button This clears all data stored in the Series PD on board memory To save a file right mouse click on the file and save to another location Series PD Alona Deve F Th npe aar ioir Gompf i WAST on Tor Ner Ai PE ae ana 4 Tred Informatean Siorniae Device Denice morman Biya Conr j H a i i mand r q ig 1 i fa a FH Sg H i Eiye E uP Biome foe r E l PRI Eg EAT T i AM tet ube BS Ase i Fast Te E Matna r ik 4 ETN Cita oes Bee Geri AB t eo myi Fih Mirra F a FH i Hr i Wat Var r Tua More H 5 regis Append DOBE bar a ed ni s s a fe eh Ps F Fett 13R1 ER Ueed 365 EF Fees 19246 EA Total veem Infonmatien ae aia kad sj 4 Wdorage Derice I ENED Wima E 9146 byte Bri Wired ini 3 DH C B 20 Sete horma bs fe 112 mo SDH toga a ies Ha 21 EB Trd 193 EE Free 216 KB Total Disa Enisa Fila SrHirs q j G Uplead File fixer Lipicasi Figure 55 File Manager Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 55 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag File Manager Parameters l To Delete 2 File Name datalog files 3 Open Mode 4 Delete Selected Storage Device 0 5 File Name 6 Navigation Frame Link T Delete Selected Storage Dev
229. rrent Transformer Alarm Parameters gt Alarm Set Point Enter the load current value that will trip the current transformer alarm Watlow Series PD Chapter 10 Features There are limitations when using CT inputs e To obtain a valid load current reading the output on time must be a minimum of 0 4 seconds To cal culate output on time multiply the percent output times the cycle time setting For example with 30 output and a 2 second cycle time the on time would be 0 30 x 2 0 6 seconds This on time is greater than the 0 4 second minimum and would result in a valid load current reading In this example any out put power levels below 20 output would result in on times that are less than 0 4 seconds If the on time is too short to allow a valid current reading the last valid reading is used e CT inputs will only function with time propor tioned outputs output options C E K or J and the output must be configured for fixed time base opera tion e CT inputs cannot be assigned to process outputs output option F The CT input can accept up to 5 0mA ac maxi mum An interstage transformer may be used for larger loads See Chapter 2 Digital Inputs Inputs 3 and 4 can be ordered as digital inputs Digi tal inputs allow an operator to perform certain functions by opening or closing a switch or applying a dc logic sig nal to the Series PD This feature can add convenience safety or security to a system Th
230. rtional band from set point PID Sets 2 in process units Loop 2 PID Set 1 Crossover Point Set crossover value to switch from PID Set 1 to PID Set 2 Web Page Your Range Default Modbus Settings Read write and scaling Process Value 0 Set Point 1 Configuration Loop 1000 to 999000 degrees or 799 800 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 units 0 to 99990 minutes 801 802 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 9990 minutes 803 804 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 999000 degrees or units 797 798 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 25000 30000000 807 808 R W 1000 1000 to 999000 degrees or units Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 99990 minutes 809 810 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 9990 minutes 811 812 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Multiple PID Sets 2 0 to 999000 degrees or units 805 806 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Configuration Multiple 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units 789 790 R W 1000 Configuration Loop Settings 2 Watlow Series PD CO Chapter 9 Device Config Ta
231. s 1 Modbus Read write and scaling Default Watlow Series PD 120 Chapt er 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Datalogging gt Clock Parameter Name Web Page and Description Your Settings Modbus Read write and scaling Range Default Real Time Clock Current Time Display current stored Time Real Time Clock Current Date Display current stored Date Configuration Data logging Clock Real Time Clock Time Zone Display stored time zone Real Time Clock Enable Syn Configuration Data chronize with Server logging Clock Enable real time clock to auto matically synchronize with a time server Real Time Clock Server IP Resolution Selects the method for assigning the clock server IP address Configuration Data logging Settings Real Time Clock Server Configuration Data Name logging Clock Specify real time server name Configuration Data logging Clock Real Time Clock Server Fixed IP Address Specify real time server fixed IP address Watlow Series PD 121 Hours Minutes Seconds AM PM Month Day Year Up to four alpha characters Server IP Resolution via DCHP Server IP Resolution via Server Name Server IP Resolution via Fixed Address 2147483647 to 2147483647 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Hardware Parameter Name and Description Web Page Your Settings Range Modbus Re
232. s Scale Enter a value for Low Process Scale and High Process Scale Click the Submit button to send the new values Load Current Monitoring Inputs 3 and 4 can be ordered as current trans former CT inputs These inputs can be assigned to monitor any control output except process outputs and trigger an alarm when the load current drops below the CT alarm set point value This is ideal for detecting heater loss in applications with multiple heaters For in stance if a system has five 10 amp heaters the CT in put measures 50 amps regardless of the percent output power requested Load current is only measured when the time proportioned output is on The standard Watlow CT is designed to measure up to 50 amps of current as it passes through the center of the CT See Chapter 2 for wiring information The CT provides an output of approximately 1 mA ac per amp of ac current The CT must be purchased separately To enable a CT input go to Device Configuration gt Inputs gt CT Input 3 or 4 gt CT Input Function and select CT Input To configure the CT input go to Device Configura tion gt Inputs gt CT Input 3 or 4 gt Current Trans former Parameters Set the these parameters to match your application requirements To monitor load current go to Monitor Device gt Input Status gt Input 3 or 4 Value To set the Current Transformer Alarm Set Point go to Device Configuration gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Cu
233. set High Current Scale to 20 Selects what variable is represented by the retransmit signal Process 1 Set Point 1 Process 2 or Set Point 2 Loop 2 parameters available on dual channel model only Sets the value represented by the low voltage or current scale For example if you want a 1 5 Vdc signal to represent 30 to 100 C set Scale Low to 30 Sets the value represented by the high voltage or current scale For example if you want a 1 5 Vdc signal to represent 30 to 100 C set Scale High to 100 Selects what sources are assigned as inputs to the logic function All alarm outputs and any digital inputs are available as input sources Selects the logic function applied to the alarms and digital inputs selected AND or OR logic Selects the output state when the output is active Energized or Shifts the retransmit output signal up or down De engergized Figure 40 Process Output Configuration Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 40 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Time Proportioned Output Configuration The Time Proportioned Output Configuration page sets the parameters for the time proportioned outputs in stalled Outputs can be configured as control outputs or event alarm outputs A time proportioned output cycles on and off The time the output is on versus off The Time Proportioned Output Configuration page is shown below You can see and change all of the parameters on the Output Configuration page Onl
234. sis for each crossover A rising temperature will change PID sets at the crossover value A falling temperature will change PID sets at the crossover value 1 To view or change the the PID values or crossover set points go to Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt Multiple PID Sets gt PID Set No 1 2 3 4 or 5 Enter PID values and a crossover set point for each PID set and click the Submit button to send the new values Example Operating Range PID Set 5 PID Crossover SP 4to5 1250 F Operating Range PID Set 4 PID Crossover SP 3to4 1 000 F Operating Range PID Set 3 PID Crossover SP 2to3 600 F Operating Range PID Set 2 PID Crossover SP 1to2 300 F Operating Range PID Set 1 Watlow Series PD 135 Chapter 10 Features Alarms Alarms are activated when the process value or tem perature leaves a defined range A user can configure how and when an alarm is triggered what action it takes and whether it turns off automatically when the alarm condition is over To configure an output as an alarm output go to Device Configuration gt Output 1 2 3 or 4 gt Out put Function and select Event Click the Submit but ton to send the new value Process Alarms A process alarm uses an absolute set point to define the alarm condition The alarm set point is independent from the auto set point To configure an event output as a process alarm go
235. sor Type Select the correct sensor type Depending on your sensor type you must also set the T C RTD or Process Parameter values Click the Submit button to send the new values Set Point Low Limit and High Limit The controller constrains the set point to a value be tween a low limit and a high limit The set point limits must fall between the sensor low and high range limits Set point values outside of the set point limits are not valid To view or change the sensor type go to Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt Set Point Limit Low or Set Point Limit High Enter a value for Limit Low and Limit High Click the Submit button to send the new values High Limit of selected Sensor Range g g Set Point Limit High between High Limit and Low Limit of Sensor Limit High Set Point Range must be between Range High and Range Low Temperature Limit Low Set Point Limit Low between Low Limit and High Limit of Sensor Low Limit of selected Sensor Range ae Voltage or Current Scaling When an analog input is selected as process voltage or process current input you must choose the value of voltage or current to be the low and high ends For ex ample when using a 4 to 20 mA input the scale low value would be 4 00 mA and the scale high value would be 20 00 mA Commonly used scale ranges are 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 5V 1 to 5V and O to 10V The Series PD allows you to cre
236. sponding output 1000 hak oe 7 108 1 15 6C 1 F 1027 1028 108 1 16 6C 1 10 1029 1030 CJC Temperature 1 or 2 Displays the cold junction compensation ae Eoo s oe ae o ee 108 1 9 6C 1 9 1015 1016 DINT at temperature ea eae Build ea eae the firmware build number otosa767 to 32767 100111 are 64 1 B Indicates the number of alarms implemented Indicates the number of control loops Bit Pattern 1 le enue cfepnbel ways ff 100 1 2 64 1 2 UINT OR Bit Pattern 2 Oooo AA ex AA hex 1001 3 64 13 UINT OR ASCII 12 o 12 ASCII PE 12 ASCII 100 1 4 64 1 4 UINT ASCII 34 FP 23 ASCI eee 100 1 5 64 1 5 Indgstosthetimwate Drumber A a incon Indcstesthetrnware branch umber e a stacy er a C Oooo l UINT 100 1 19 64 1 13 Indicates the total number of PID sets per loop pag y pag y Number of PID Sets Implemented 1179 SHORT_STRING Indicates the number of PID sets implemented ee Device Configuration gt Network gt TCP IP Settings Device Name PDxxxxxx last six digits of Specify the controller s name The controller can serial number 2 be browsed using this name via NetBIOS Network Configuration characters per word in 1st element of STRUCT of UDINT 5 STRING 2nd element of Modbus STRUCT of UDINT 5 STRING 3rd element of STRUCT of UDINT 5 STRING 4th element of STRUCT of UDINT 5 STRING 108 1 49 6C 1 31 Current Settings IP Address Indicates the
237. ssion function With data compression en abled parameter values only get logged if the value has changed Yes or No 11 When log file is full Selects the action the Series PD should take when a log file gets full Stop Logging or Overwrite Oldest Data Write Log File to TFTP Server Enables the Series PD to transfer logged information to a TFTP trivial file transfer protocol server Yes or No 13 TFTP Server IP Resolution Selects the method for assigning the TFTP server IP address Get Server IP from Server Name or Fixed Server Address server name used for assigning an TFTP Server Fixed Address Sets the TFTP server fixed IP address 16 Send Email on Error Enables email to be sent if TFTP server is unavailable for upload 17 Delete All Datalog File Deletes all datalog files currently stored in the Series PD Be sure you have transferred any files you want to keep Figure 52 Datalog Configuration Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 52 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Clock Configuration Page The Clock Configuration page sets up time date and time server synchronization data A time server is an ap plication that periodically goes out to a time standard E Series PD Montor Device This page war foaded Dam POOOOIS7 on Wed Get OF 15 07 21 Sas Trend Information The dock time etered below is used for tenestamping data m datalog Mex Device Information 1 a oh 4 EDevice Configuration Bimer BC
238. ssover value to switch from PID Set 4 to PID Set 5 N N Ol Ol Watlow Series PD 81 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 gt PID Set 5 Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling 743 744 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 5 Indirect Configuration Multiple Prop Band PID Sets 1 Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 745 746 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 5 Indirect Configuration Multiple 0 to 99990 minutes Integral PID Sets 1 Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat 747 748 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 5 Indirect Configuration Multiple 0 to 9990 minutes Derivative PID Sets 1 Set the heat indirect deriva tive time in minutes 741 742 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 5 Indirect Configuration Multiple Dead Band PID Sets 1 Set the offset of the heat indi rect proportional band from set point in process units 0 to 999000 degrees or units 751 752 R W 1000 Loop 1 PID Set 5 Direct Configuration Multiple Prop Band PID Sets 1 Set the cool direct propor tional band from set point in process units 1000 to 999000 degrees or units 753 754 R W 1000 Configuration Multiple 0 to 99990 minutes PID Sets 1 Set the coo
239. ssword to access the Calibration web page lanw i Ci ic re s PD Mi ruber Lhe 1 A Tir PPLE FAE TT iac MEUN aai AA ee ey DT a aA ea T Trend Intormation Cabbrate Analog Input Device lil f tin at Hon ahilirate Analog lpp ot SDevice Conhguration Calibrate Analog Output Fe igre BC ona Leger HE haart Resio Factory Calaration EA Soe Ee sree Eisa mpr i Cakra a oo aian Parameter Dectaolis and User Configuration Restore Contre Ceim oy 5 Fa skied Teal M E p n Eave Us a Seles Fasie Leer Seiling Figure 59 Calibration Web Page Example Restoring Factory Calibration If the Factory Calibration gets corrupted the Restore Factory Calibration function restores all of the original factory calibration values for all analog inputs and outputs To perform a calibration restore go to Device Config uration gt Calibration and click on the Restore Factory Calibration button Restoring Control Defaults To set all controller parameter values back to factory default settings go to Device Configuration gt Calibra tion and click on the Restore Control Defaults button Note Allow six seconds for all of the parameter settings to get set back to factory defaults values Save and Restore User Settings Recording all the Series PD parameter settings for future reference is very important If the settings get uninten tionally changed you will need to program the correct settings back into the
240. state Relay PD__ K_s e Form A contact e 0 5 A resistive e 20 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive e 24 to 240V ac e See Quencharc note e Minimum load current 10 mA e Maximum leakage current 100 pA e Not for use with direct current dc e Output does not supply power Solid state Relay m e e e e e e e e e Solid state Switch i 120 COM ES I 121 NO I Internal Circuitry A Oo 20 com TN 21 normally open Figure 16c Output 3 Switched DC PD__ __C_ e Maximum supply current 30 mA dc e Supply voltage 24V dc e Not for switching mechanical relays e Output supplies power Switched DC aS 20 com 21 DC 16 Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Quencharc Note Switching pilot duty loads relay coils solenoids etc with the mechanical relay or solid state relay output options requires use of an R C suppressor Watlow carries the R C suppres sor Quencharc brand name which is a trademark of ITW Paktron Watlow Part No 0804 0147 0000 Note A current transformer input is not available for Output 1 or 3 if a process output Note 24 V input power re q
241. t Output Configuration TL A lala 125 16 bit 124 16 bit 8 bit Cancel Hest gt Help 153 Name This field when entered will automatically be added as a controller tag and will be used in the program when referencing PD inputs or outputs Description No entry required Comm Format As can be seen in the Static and Dynamic assemblies below the PD data formats are dependent on the tag name being written to or read from See data types below IP Address Enter here the previously acquired PD IP address Assembly Instance Inout PD to ControlLogix This field will identify either the Static 0x64 100 decimal or Dynamic 0x65 101 decimal input assembly Target to Originator T gt O Output ControlLogix to PD This field will identify either the Static 0x70 112 decimal or Dynamic 0x71 113 decimal output assembly Originator to Target O gt T Configuration The PD does not use the configuration instance 0x80 128 decimal however it still needs to be entered here Assembly Size The assembly size is dependent upon 2 factors 1 Comm Format i e DINT or INT 2 Size will vary depending on whether or not the Static or Dynamic Assembly is in use Static O gt T max size 10 words Dynamic O gt T max size 30 words Static T gt O max size 22 words Dynamic T gt O max size 42 words The size for the configuration instance although not used will always be stated as 0 D
242. t Configuration Multiple Derivative PID Sets 2 Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes 821 822 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Direct Configuration Multiple Dead Band PID Sets 2 Set the offset of the cool di rect proportional band from set point in process units 0 to 999000 degrees or units 30000000 to 30000000 30000000 degrees or units 791 792 R W 1000 Loop 2 PID Set 2 Crossover Configuration Loop Point Settings 2 Set crossover value to switch from PID Set 2 to PID Set 3 N N Ol Ol Watlow Series PD 86 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 2 gt PID Set 3 Parameter Name and Description Loop 2 PID Set 3 Indirect Prop Band Set the heat indirect propor tional band from set point in process units Set the heat indirect integral in minutes per repeat Loop 2 PID Set 3 Indirect Derivative Set the heat indirect deriva tive time in minutes Loop 2 PID Set 3 Indirect Dead Band Set the offset of the heat indi rect proportional band from set point in process units Set the cool direct propor tional band from set point in process units Loop 2 PID Set 3 Direct Integral Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat Loop 2 PID Set 3 Direct Derivative Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes Loop 2 PID Set 3 Direct Dead Band Set the offset
243. t value for low process scale This setting is the dis played process value when the analog input is at minimum Configuration Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 High Process Scale Set unit value for high process scale This setting is the displayed process value when the analog input is at maximum Configuration Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 Low Voltage Scale Set unit value for low end of voltage range This setting de termines range of input Configuration Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2 High Voltage Scale Set unit value for high end of voltage range This setting determines range of input Configuration Analog Input 2 Your Settings Range None 0 Thermocouple 1 RTD 2 Voltage Process 3 Current Process 4 INFOSENSE PnP 5 DIN 0 385 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 2 0 000 3 characters 0 to 10000 units O to 10000 units Up to four alpha numeric 30000000 to 30000000 units 30000000 to 30000000 units Default Modbus Read write and scaling DIN 0 385 0 283 R W o o 30000000 292 293 R W 1000 30000000 10000 294 295 R W 1000 288 289 R W 1000 290 291 R W 1000 Watlow Series PD Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling 0 to 20000 units 284 285 R W 1000 Scal
244. ting reverse action or cooling direct action Output 1 Control Source Configuration Output 1 Set Loop which will control this output Output 1 Output Cycle Time Configuration Output 1 Set the cycle time in seconds 1 0 to 60 seconds for me relay output chanical relay outputs 10 0 seconds for mechanical relay output Fixed 0 Fixed 0 Variable 1 0 to 10000 418 419 R W two decimal places 100 0 to 10000 10000 420 421 R W two decimal places 100 AND 0 AND 0 399 R W OR 1 Watlow Series PD 90 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Output 1 Output Mode Configuration Output 1 Time Base Select method of output con trol as either Fixed Time Base or Variable Time Base Output 1 Low Power Scale Configuration Output 1 Set unit value for low power scale This setting is the process power value when the analog output is at minimum Output 1 High Power Scale Configuration Output 1 Set unit value for high power scale This setting is the process power value when the analog output is at maximum Output 1 Logic Operator Configuration Output 1 Select logic operation for event output Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling No 0 No 0 400 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 401 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 402 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 403 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 404 R W Yes 1 No 0 N
245. tion Page Tag Digital Input Configuration Parameters 1 Function Active State Acknowledge Alarm 3 Alarm Action 4 Which Alarms Switch to Manual Control 5 Which Loops Switch Control Loop Off 6 Which Loops Digital Set Point re Which Loop 8 Digital Set Point Parameter Description Selects the digital input function when the digital input active condition is satisfied Off disabled Switch to Digital Set Point Acknowledge Alarm s Switch to Manual Control Switch Control Loop Off or Pause Data Logging Selects the type of signal change required to trigger the digital in put Low Falling Edge or High Rising Edge Selects the alarm actions to be taken when the digital input active state is satisfied Silence Acknowledge or Silence and Acknowledge Sets the alarms that are affected by the alarm action setting Alarm 1 through Alarm 8 Sets the Control Loop that switches to Manual Control when the digital input active state is satisfied Loop 1 or Loop 2 Sets the Control Loop that switches to Off disabled when the digital input active state is satisfied Loop 1 or Loop 2 Sets the Control Loop that switches to the Digital Set Point when the digital input active state is satisfied Loop 1 or Loop 2 Sets the Digital Set Point used when the digital input active state is satisfied Value must be within the set point range limits Figure 32 Digital Input Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow
246. tion for compar ison to the alarm set point Alarm 4 Process Alarm Set Point Set the alarm process set point in absolute degrees or units Alarm 4 Deviation From Source Select control loop where this alarm gets the control set point for comparison to the alarm set point Alarm 4 Deviation Alarm Set Point Set the alarm deviation set point in degrees or units from set point Alarm 4 CT Measurement Source Select source of current trans former measurement to gener ate Alarm 4 Alarm 4 CT Alarm Set Point Enter current transformer set point for Alarm 4 to activate Web Page Monitor Device Trend Information Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 4 Monitor Device Configuration Alarm 4 Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 4 Configuration Alarm 4 Monitor Device Trend Information Configuration Alarm 4 Configuration Alarm 4 Configuration Alarm 4 Your Settings Active 1 Modbus Read write and scaling Range Default Inactive 0 142 R 145 146 R W 1000 Inactive 0 Silenced 2 Off 0 Low Process 1 High Process 2 Low Deviation 3 High Deviation 4 Low CT 5 High CT 6 Off 0 Process Value 1 0 Process Value 2 1 30000000 to 30000000 degrees or units Loop 1 0 Loop 2 1 Loop 1 0 575 R W 2000000200 to 2000000200 1 143 144 R W degrees or units 1000 Off 0 576
247. to the Low Process Scale High Voltage Scale Set the input process voltage in Valls thatwil oS Pun orek gigio doo eg neue 10000 eee oe DINT l Configuration Analog Input 2 102 2 7 66 2 7 290 291 correspond to the High Process Scale Low Current Scale l be aette Analog Input 1 or 2 Analog Input 1 102 1 4 66 1 4 254 255 Set the input process current in milliamps that wil Configuration O to 20 000 1000 Analog Input 2 4000 102 2 4 66 2 4 284 285 DINT R W correspond to the Low Process Scale SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 171 WebPage High Current Scale Set the input process current in milliamps that wil correspond to the High Process Scale Temperature Process Value Units Indicates the temperature units displayed in the web pages for a thermocouple and RTD input This can be setin the web Temperature Process Value Precision Indicates the number of decimal places displayed in the web pages for a thermocouple or RTD input This can be set in the web page Filter Method Select a filter method to smooth out a rapidly changing input signal Filter Time Base Set the filter time A higher value will smooth out the signal more Single Offset Value Analog Input 1 or 2 Set a value to compensate for the input s lead Confi onfiguration resistance and sensor inaccurac Function CT Input 3 or 4 Set whether to enable the CT input Configuration CT Precision Indicates the number of de
248. tomization of the Series PD web pages The web page elements fonts colors and format ting can be changed by editing the cascade style sheet file Most browsers support cascade style sheets The contents of the default style sheet are as fol lows Logo float left Banner font italic 46px Times width 100 text align center background color FFFFCC color 6699CC border bottom width 2 border bottom style solid border bottom color 004488 I NavigationBody font 18px Times background color FFFFCC color 004488 margin left 1 margin top 1 DeviceDisclaimer font 12px Times text align left PageTitle font 30px Times width 100 text align center background color 004488 color 6699CC PageBody font 18px Times background color FFFFFF color 004488 margin left 1 margin top 1 MonitorHeader font 14px Times width 100 text align left background color 6699CC color 004488 Alert background color FF0000 NoAlert Warning font bold color FF0000 A link text decoration underline color 004488 A visited text decoration underline color 004488 A active text decoration none color 6699cc A hover text decoration underline color FF0000 The following is used for the explorer like navigation system mhead width 100 margin 0px padding 1px display block font size 100 font
249. tor when configuring the Series PD email functions to operate on your network Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD kfomtor Device THE page wis faaded Dom ae oo Wed Oet Gr MASS 00a Tretel information Fleetrane Notification Device Information Frias iiggered by alarms bert buon ete before the SMTP Server P is resolved me net sem BDevice Configuration SMTP Sere IF Resolution Get Barsi IP From Barrer Hama ai BA Lope Sh PServer Hara j _ E Paargiie EEP Conny r A Comte Lon Outre SMTP Server Fari A duress pon i 2 3 E Exaegke 77 001 AAi Hiiti Em Aii Fal Esample poe merece coop ery com 2 a J TEPI Sring Boel Reip flee pi pagr com hn Esval R vipieis J _ 6 Enema aeons ons Sane Emal Racipurrs Mf Epi Fao oday oom Fis System Raval Pectpaard 4 a MB beers Loar thank F used a Byahing When the SMTP server FP address has been resobred a botton wi appear below to gemd atest emu jo all reperis Siati information Chek bere to refresh pape Bast Viewed In TE 5 HH TIA i Peoria 0 Figure 47 Email Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 47 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Email Configuration Parameters Electronic Notificatio
250. tput Source Configuration Output 4 No 0 No 0 514 R W Alarm 5 Yes 1 Set to enable Alarm 5 source Output 4 Output Source No 0 No 0 515 R W Alarm 6 Yes 1 Set to enable Alarm 6 source Output 4 Output Source Configuration Output 4 No 0 No 0 516 R W Alarm 7 Yes 1 Set to enable Alarm 7 source Output 4 Output Source Configuration Output 4 No 0 No 0 517 R W Alarm 8 Yes 1 Set to enable Alarm 8 source Output 4 Output Logic Configuration Output 4 Energized 0 Energized 0 518 R W Select output state in an De energized 1 alarm true condition Output 4 Output Source Digi Configuration Output 4 No 0 No 0 523 R W tal 3 Yes 1 Set to enable Digital Input 3 source Output 4 Output Source Digi Configuration Output 4 No 0 No 0 524 R W tal 4 Yes 1 Set to enable Digital Input 4 source Output 1 4 Expected System Configuration Output 1 50 Hz 0 60 Hz 0 1075 R W Line Frequency Configuration Output 2 60 Hz 1 Set the line frequency of the Configuration Output 3 input power if the zero cross Configuration Output 4 detection circuit fails Watlow Series PD 99 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Device Configuration gt Alarms gt Alarm 1 Parameter Name and Description Alarm 1 Status Display status of Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Type Select alarm type A process alarm responds when the tem perature crosses a fixed value A deviation alarm responds when the temperature
251. tput assembly instance and size to accommodate for the new assembly size The size was increased one word simply because that is the way this attribute was formatted UINT Figure 4 0f E Module Properties ENBTA ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 E3 General Connection Module Info Type ETHEANET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Wendor Allen Bradley Parent ENB TA Mame hwat PO Description Comm Format ddress Host Mame IP Address TO ss ear a C Host Name Connection Parameters Assembly l Instance alze Input 1 0g fe 16 bit eana BGE E TERP Configuration 128 jo 85 bit Py LO Status Offline cancel re Prior to downloading this change back to the control don t forget to go back to the connection tab figure 4 0a above and uncheck the Inhibit Module check box After doing so download the changes back to the control After going on line with the control in the run mode go to the Controller Tags for the PD outputs you should see that the size increased by one word In this example the 10 word would represent the PD Autotune feature Go to monitor tags if not already there and enter the following values to either start or stop Autotune 0 Stop Autotune 1 Start Autotune Figure 4 0g VW athow POO A atow PO O Data Wiatlow PO O D ata 0 We atlow PO 0 D atali Wy atlows POO Datal 2 watkow POO DO atala Wi atow FPO 0 0 atal 4 Wy atlows POO
252. trol The droop caused by proportional control can be cor rected by adding integral reset control When the sys tem settles down the integral value is tuned to bring the temperature or process value closer to the set point Integral determines the speed of the correction but this may increase the overshoot at startup or when the set point is changed Too much integral action will make the system unstable Integral is cleared when the process value is outside of the proportional band Integral is measured in minutes per repeat A low integral value causes a fast integrating action and a high integral value causes a slow integrating action In tegral is the inverse of reset To view or change the Integral value go to Device Configuration gt Control Loops gt Loop 1 or 2 gt Loop Settings gt PID Parameters gt PID Set 1 Integral Heat Indirect or PID Set 1 Integral Cool Direct Enter a value for Integral and click the Submit button to send the new value Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative PID Control Use derivative rate control to minimize the over shoot in a Pl controlled system Derivative rate ad justs the output based on the rate of change in the tem perature or process value Too much derivative rate will make the system sluggish Rate action is active only when the process value is within twice the proportional value from the set point To view or change the Derivative value go to De vic
253. troller event alarm or control Power 2 Output wala ink Red light is lit or flashes when fl Ethernet Activity control Output 2 is active If it does not light up the output is not active The output may be configured as an event alarm or control Input Error 1 3 Output Input Error Red light is lit or flashes when l Output O control Output 3 is active If it does i not light up the output is not active Output The output may be configured as an Output Gy event alarm or control puipui 4 Output oan Red light is lit or flashes when control Output 4 is active If it does not light up the output is not active The output may be configured as an event alarm or control Address Field Record the unit s Device Name in erasable marker here For example PD012345 Figure 18 Series PD LED Indicator Lights Heartbeat LED Diagnostics e Application Mode normal operation 1 flash per second e Test Mode internal factory calibration 10 flashes per second e Boot Code internal factory configuration 1 flash per 2 seconds Both Input Error LEDs Lit e TFTP Mode flash download in progress Watlow Series PD 19 Chapter 3 Indicator Lights 4 Ethernet Communications Network security is a critical issue for any network Be sure to work with your network administrator to ensure that you follow best security practices to ensure a secure network environment Here are some items to
254. uired to use single cycle vari able time base output function Watlow Series PD Figure 17a Output 3 Open Collector PD__ __C_ e Maximum current sink 200 mA dc e Maximum supply voltage 42V dc e Output does not supply power Class 2 power source required for agency compliance Open Collector 19 DC H XT 20 com 21 DC Figure 17b Output 3 Process PD F _ e Analog output scalable from 0 to 10V dc or 0 to 20 mA dc e Load capability voltage 1 kQ minimum current 800 Q maximum e Output supplies power e Cannot use voltage and current output at the same time 19 volts 20 com 21 amps i oF Lo Oc 6L Figure 17c Output 4 Mechanical Relay PD__ ___E e Form C contacts e 2A resistive e 125 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive e 240V ac maximum e 30V dc maximum e See Quencharc note e For use with ac or dc e Minimum load current 10 mA e Output does not supply power Mechanical Relay 22 normally closed 23 com 24 normally open Vo Ec ce 17 Chapter 2 Install and Wire A Warning Use National Electric NEC or other country specific standard wiring and safety practices when wiring and connecting this con troller to a power source and to electrical sensors or peripheral devices Failure to do so may re sult in damage to equipment and property and or injury or loss of life Quencharc Note Switching pilot duty loads rela
255. ult 490 491 R W 100 No 0 No 0 470 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 471 R W Yes 1 Watlow Series PD 95 Chapter 9 Device Config Table Parameter Name Web Page Your Range Default Modbus and Description Settings Read write and scaling No 0 No 0 473 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 474 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 475 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 476 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 477 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 499 R W Yes 1 No 0 No 0 500 R W Yes 1 Output 3 Output Source Configuration Output 3 Alarm 4 Set to enable Alarm 4 source Output 3 Output Source Configuration Output 3 Alarm 5 Set to enable Alarm 5 source Output 3 Output Source Configuration Output 3 Alarm 6 Set to enable Alarm 6 source Output 3 Output Source Configuration Output 3 Alarm 7 Set to enable Alarm 7 source Output 3 Output Source Configuration Output 3 Alarm 8 Set to enable Alarm 8 source Output 3 Output Source Configuration Output 3 Digital 3 Set to enable Digital Input 3 source Output 3 Output Source Configuration Output 3 Digital 4 Set to enable Digital Input 4 source Output 3 Output Logic Configuration Output 3 Energized 0 478 R W Select output state in an De energized 1 alarm true condition Output 3 Analog Type Configuration Output 3 Voltage 0 479 R W Current 1 Select analog output type
256. uning Once the autotune is complete Control Loop Status reverts to its original status Process Set Point Autotune complete Autotune begins N Autotune Set Point 90 percent of Process Set Point Temperature Time Inputs INFOSENSE P Temperature Sensing Watlow s INFOSENSE P feature can improve temperature sensing accuracy by 50 Watlow s INFO SENSE P thermocouples and RTD temperature sen sors must be used together to achieve these results Each INFOSENSE P plug and play smart sen sor provides sensor characterization information to the Series PD These values characterize Watlow sensors resulting in greater system accuracy To set up an analog input to accept an INFOS ENSE P sensor go to Device Configuration gt In puts gt Analog Input 1 or 2 gt Analog Input Sensor Type and select InfoSense PnP The Series PD reads the INFOSENSE P sensor information upon power up and any time an input error occurs Contact your Watlow salesperson or Watlow au thorized distributor for the pricing and availability of Watlow INFOSENSE P sensor products Watlow Series PD 130 Calibration Offset Calibration offset allows a device to compensate for an inaccurate sensor lead resistance or other factors that affect the input value A positive offset increases the input value and a negative offset decreases the in put value To view or change the input offset value go to
257. uration Page The Datalog Configuration page sets up what parameters get logged the time interval for logging the data and what to do with the data once it has been logged Bro Sertes PD Monitor Device FS __ sS atalog Configuration O O Tia page war loaded fom POSS on Tue Sep J0 IS 30 Se 2 end Informatio Data Lowen Demat bed i Device Informatbon pi aoe ed Parameters To Data Lo BDaice Conhguraton Rips m ieii aii 4 akain ap pap qf Loop 1 Power 44 ECan Loops I Process Vali Workng Set Pom 2 M Loop 2 Pew B Oupa E Datu Input lt j 5 As Tips 4 aipha Abr Status l Alm 2 staht l Alum 3 Status l Alarm 4 S Setir Alma 5 Status O Alim amp Status C Alem T Status C Alam E jo 7 Chah a g Ss Seren Lopeunp Parameters Catbrates Loggng Inierval fi Secchids Logeng Duta Compresmon Yes or weeer Oho tus in be bgr Whee log Ge s full Oeeratite Cie Daa ap Wrote Log Fie To TRIP Server He 1 ee T TPTP Server IP Resotution Get Barer IP From Samar Hama q 9 PE eae AARTE TFTP Server Hame L mi a LEIP Server Fated Addren po Di iyi F Eseg L700 Send Emad n Error ha e 16 Celete Aj Datatog Firs A Suomi Rasat Figure 51 Datalog Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 51 Chapter 7 Configuration P
258. using the Dynamic Assembly The output assembly size would change accordingly for the given formats DINT 6 INT 11 2 2 5 EtherNet IP Indicator Lights The PD comes equipped with two new LED s The LED characteristics are defined by Open DeviceNet Vendors Association ODVA Figure 2 2 5a Module Status Indicator g Indicator State lf no power is supplied to the device the Steady Off No power module status indicator shall be steady off 157 Device lf the device is operating correctly the Steady Green operational module status indicator shall be steady green lf the device has not been configured the Flashing Standb module status indicator shall be Green y flashing green If the device has detected a recoverable minor fault the module status indicator l shall be flashing red Flashing Red Minor fault NOTE An incorrect or inconsistent configuration would be considered a minor fault If the device has detected a non recoverable Steady Red Major fault major fault the module status indicator shall be steady red Flashing While the device is performing its power up Green Self test testing the module status indicator Red shall be flashing green red Figure 2 2 5b Network Status Indicators Notpowered If the device does not have an IP address or is Steady Off no Address powered off the network status indicator shall be e steady off If the device has no established connections but has obtain
259. ut 3 Analog Input 4 Monitor Device Under Flow Fault 4 Over Flow Fault 5 INFOSENSE Fault 6 Lead i Fault 101 1 4 65 1 4 101 1 9 65 1 9 101 1 14 65 1 E SUNT 101 1 19 65 1 13 Failure Latching Acknowledge a Loop 1 101 1 5 65 1 5 38 Digital Input 3 Switch To Digital Set Point Status Inactive 0 Loop 1 l 101 1 24 65 1 18 64 Monitor D Inactive 0 UINT Indicates whether Digital Input 3 has switched the le Active 1 Loop 2 nagtve 0 101 1 29 65 1 1D 71 Digital Input 4 Switch To Digital Set Point Status l l Inactive 0 Loop 1 i 101 1 25 65 1 19 65 Monitor D i Inactive 0 UINT Indicates whether Digital Input 4 has switched the E Active 1 Loop 2 NACUNENH 101 1 30 65 1 1E 72 loop to the digital setpoint ae pe cence ae se E Monitor Device nae eau ae Inactive 0 TOVLASA eS UINT siege eee Active 1 Loop 2 101 1 28 65 1 1C 70 Digital Input Switch Loop 1 or 2 to Manual Status i Inactive 0 Loop 1 l 101 1 22 65 1 16 62 Monitor D l Inactive 0 UINT Indicates whether a digital input has switched the ME ARATRI Active 1 Loop 2 EGUNE KO 101 1 27 65 1 1B 69 loop to manual Working Set Point Indicates the active set point whether the auto set l Loop 1 101 1 33 65 1 21 78 79 point digital set point or the ramp to set point MODIOE RENCE 1090 Loop 2 PORI 101 1 41 65 1 29 92 93 ND Indicates the heat indirect output power MODIOPDEVIGE 940 10 000 4190 Loop 2 101 1 45 65 1 2D 97 my Indicates th
260. utomatically changes with it To configure an event output as a deviation alarm go to Device Configuration gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 gt Alarm Type and select Low Deviation or High Deviation Click the Submit button to send the new val ue Watlow Series PD 136 The high deviation alarm set point defines the maxi mum deviation from the auto set point that triggers a high side alarm To calculate the high deviation alarm trip point Auto Set Point High Deviation Alarm Set Point High Deviation Alarm Trip Point A positive value results in a trip point above the auto set point and a negative value results in a trip point below the auto set point Alarm Hysteresis Set Point 100 Temperature Alarm Inactive Alarm Hysteresis Time The low deviation alarm set point defines the maxi mum deviation from the auto set point that triggers a low side alarm To calculate the low deviation alarm trip point Auto Set Point Low Deviation Alarm Set Point Low Deviation Alarm Trip Point A positive value results in a trip point below the au to set point and a negative value results in a trip point above the auto set point SP LDA Alarm Trip Point A Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Inactive Set Point 100 Temperature Alarm Hysteresis Time To view or change a Deviation Alarm Set Point go to Monitor Device gt Alarm Status gt Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 Set Point Enter the Alarm Set
261. utput 1 Function Control Output Parameters Output Direction 3 Loop 4 Low Power Scale p High Power Scale Process Parameters 6 Analog Signal rp Low Voltage Scale 8 High Voltage Scale 9 Low Current Scale 10 High Current Scale Retransmit Parameters 11 Source 12 Scale Low 13 Scale High 14 Offset Event Output Parameters 15 Output Source 16 Output Logic 17 Output Active State Parameter Description Retransmit Selects the output function Off disabled Control Event or Selects the output direction Off disabled Heat or Cool Selects the control loop assigned to that output Loop 1 or Loop 2 Loop 2 available on dual channel model only Sets the minimum output power level available for the output 0 to 100 Sets the maximum output power level available for the output 0 to 100 Selects the type of analog signal for the output Voltage or Current Sets the minimum value for the voltage signal scaling For exam ple if you want a 1 5 Vdc signal set Low Voltage Scale to 1 ple if you want a 1 5 Vdc signal set Low Voltage Scale to 5 Sets the minimum value for the current signal scaling For exam ple if you want a 4 20 mA signal set Low Current Scale to 4 Sets the maximum value for the current signal scaling For exam Sets the maximum value for the voltage signal scaling For exam ple if you want a 4 20 mA signal
262. utput gt Min Clearance Output gt between rail a a Front View centerlines 5 75 in Min Clearance 51 mm 2 in i 41 7 mm 1 64 in 72 9 mm 2 87 in WATLOW PD PID Controller Power Ethernet Link WATLOW PD PID Controller 1 Power Ethernet Link Ethernet Activity Ethernet Activity 0 Input Error Input Error Output a Output Output G Output O2 0 Input Error 2 Input Error Output a Output gt Output O2 Output O2 41 9 mm 1 65 in Attachment Angle 10 7 Figure 3 Series PD dimensions A Caution Maintain the correct spacing be tween rows of controllers to allow suffi cient air circulation and installation clear ance Failure to do so could result in damage to equipment Use DIN EN 50022 35 X 7 5 mm rail Watlow Series PD 3 Chapter 2 Install and Wire Mounting the Series PD Figure 4a Mounting 1 Push unit in and down to catch rail hook on top of rail 2 Rotate bottom of unit toward rail 3 Rail clasp will audibly snap into place If the Series PD does not snap into place check to see if the rail is bent Removing the Series PD 1 7 re Figure 4b Removal 1 Press down on back of the Series PD until the bottom hook clears the rail 2 Rotate bottom up and away from rail Watlow Series PD 4 Chapter 2 Install and Wire Series PD Connector Locations Two connectors on the bottom of the unit pr
263. vice Configuration parameters such as Input Type other pa rameter values that are dependent on that setting may be automatically changed Also some controllers require that any changes made by the software program to controller parameters that need to be retained in the controller memory must be saved in the non volatile memory writes register Any settings not saved to controller memory will be lost when the controller s power is turned off Chapter 10 Features 47 Troubleshooting Indication Power LED not lit Controller appears dead No communications to PC Ethernet Link LED not lit No communications to PC Ethernet Link Activity LED not lit No communication to PC Input Error LED lit Sensor over range under range message on PC Ambient error message on PC No Output from controller Output always active Output always inactive Probable Cause s e Power supply switch off e Fuse blown e Breaker tripped e Safety interlock door switch activated e Separate system limit control latched e Wiring incorrect or open e Power supply voltage incorrect e Defective controller e Incorrect cable e Defective PC or switch hub e Defective controller e Incorrect IP address assignment e Incorrect PC set up e Defective controller e Open sensor e Shorted sensor e Process has exceeded operating range e Incorrect sensor configuration e Defective controller e Temperature is
264. vice page data Loop control mode Automatic mode closed loop control Manual mode open loop control or Off loop disabled Control loop output function Heat Cool Heat Cool or Off dis abled output operation Manual mode open loop power set point Click on the desired Identifies alarms Red box appears for any alarm that is active Deviation Alarm Process Alarm or Off disabled Analog input assigned to the alarm Indicates if an alarm is inactive active or off disabled Red box appears in Alarm Number column when alarm is active Trip point for the alarm Click on the desired alarm set point en ter the new Alarm Set Point value in the pop up window and click Submit The page refreshes and displays the new Monitor Device page data If enabled the alarm output can be disabled A Silence Alarm link appears on the Monitor Device page when the alarm trips Click this link to disable the alarm output If enabled the alarm output latches when tripped An Acknowl edge link appears on the Monitor Device page when the alarm trips Once the process returns to the safe region click this button to reset the latched alarm output Figure 24 Monitor Device Web Page Tag Descriptions Watlow Series PD 24 Chapter 5 Monitor Device Page 6 Device Information Page The Device Information page provides important information about the Series PD controller Information on the controller hardware its configurati
265. y coils solenoids etc with the mechanical relay or solid state relay output options requires use of an R C suppressor Watlow carries the R C suppres sor Quencharc brand name which is a trademark of ITW Paktron Watlow Part No 0804 0147 0000 Note 24 V input power re quired to use single cycle vari able time base output function Watlow Series PD Figure 18a Output 4 Solid state Relay PD__ ___K e Form A contact e 0 5 A resistive e 20 VA pilot duty 120 240V ac inductive e 24 to 240V ac e See Quencharc note e Minimum load current 10mA e Maximum leakage current 100uA e Not for use with direct current dc e Output does not supply power Solid state Relay Solid state Switch I 23 COM N w 23 com 1 s I 24 N O S I EN 24 normally open IN I I Internal Circuitry _ Figure 18b Output 4 Switched DC PD__ ___C e Maximum supply current 30 mA dc e Supply voltage 24V dc e Not recommended for switching mechanical relays e Output supplies power Switched DC a 22 dc BS 23 com p 24 dc Figure 18c Output 4 Open Collector PD__ ___ C ____ e Maximum current sink 200 mA dc e Maximum supply voltage 42V dc e Output does not supply power Class 2 power source required for agency compliance Open Collector E N 22 dC N 23 com 18 Chapter 2 Install and Wire Indicator Lights The Series PD controller may h
266. y those that apply will be relevant For example you can set the Event Output Parameters even though you have the Output Function set to Control Only parameters relating to control outputs have any effect on the controller If you change the Output Function to Event the Event Output Parameters previously entered are used Note You must click Submit to send the new values to the Series PD Series PD Monstor Device Tins page was forded from POOR on Toe Sep 23 T3302 J003 Trend Information Caphpaut Device Informatron Function EDevnce Configuration Biper a pui Dare chien E parat ra docs aa Bihi ray ul ETE lr Jane E TEI RE ee it Chaar i uput Wode Time Ease SS anabie 5 Chima Oud Syren Lez Frequency ja Hz lt a T E A Chd wal l ma Saree Hi alr in 00 Br a AT Fi EF T ara mm Mateo High Potater Sear Hag mi ER art a BE orale PLP Seta Fvent Output Parameters dro Mipu Saingi T Alam C Alm 2 C Aim 3 C Alarms 4 C Alem 5 C Abr i y H T Alam 7 C Alem E O Dita Ipui 3 p 1 3 iJ if Le aE 4 HLI T p 1 O a a Lj Pil Hee Tige Eras prer E 1 1 Beat Viren In TE 5 HH 1H Picari DJi Subal Frese Figure 41 Time Proportioned Output Configuration Web Page Example Note Red tag arrows and tag numbers are links to item descriptions Click on a red tag arrow or number to go to a description of the item Watlow Series PD 41 Chapter 7 Configuration Page Tag Output 1 Time Prop
267. ype _ Access 106 1 18 6A 1 12 Heat Indirect Deadband Set the offset of the heat indirect proportional band from set point in process units Multiple PID Loop 1 or 2 Configuration Cool Direct Propband Set the cool direct proportional band in process units Multiple PID Loop 1 or 2 Configuration Cool Direct Integral Set the cool direct integral in minutes per repeat Multiple PID Loop 1 or 2 Configuration Cool Direct Derivative Set the cool direct derivative time in minutes Multiple PID Loop 1 or 2 Configuration Cool Direct Deadband Set the offset of the cool direct proportional band from set point in process units Multiple PID Loop 1 or 2 Configuration 0 to 999 000 1000 1 000 to 999 000 1000 0 to 99 990 1000 0 to 9 990 1000 1 000 to 999 000 1000 Loop 1 Set 1 Loop 1 Set 2 Loop 1 Set 3 Loop 1 Set 4 Loop 1 Set 5 Loop 2 Set 1 Loop 2 Set 2 Loop 2 Set 3 Loop 2 Set 4 Loop 2 Set 5 Loop 1 Set 1 Loop 1 Set 2 Loop 1 Set 3 Loop 1 Set 4 Loop 1 Set 5 Loop 2 Set 1 Loop 2 Set 2 Loop 2 Set 3 Loop 2 Set 4 Loop 2 Set 5 Loop 1 Set 1 Loop 1 Set 2 Loop 1 Set 3 Loop 1 Set 4 Loop 1 Set 5 Loop 2 Set 1 Loop 2 Set 2 Loop 2 Set 3 Loop 2 Set 4 Loop 2 Set 5 Loop 1 Set 1 Loop 1 Set 2 Loop 1 Set 3 Loop 1 Set 4 Loop 1 Set 5 Loop 2 Set 1 Loop 2 Set 2 Loop 2 Set 3 Loop 2 Set 4 Loop 2 Set 5 Loop 1 Set 1 Loop 1 Set 2 Loop 1 Set 3 Loop 1 Set 4 Loop 1 Set 5 L
268. ys the number of digital inputs implemented Device Information 0 to 2 64 1 F 19 INT Displays the number of outputs implemented Number of Possible Analog Inputs Displays the total number of analog inputs Device Information 1to4 Web page only Web page only available Number of Possible Digital Inputs Displays the total number of digital inputs Device Information 0 to 2 Web page only Web page only available Number of Possible Outputs l Displays the total number of outputs available Device Information Web page only Web page only Output 1 to 4 Type None 0 Displays the type of hardware present for the Switched DC 1 Output 1 Switched DC 1 108 1 23 60 1 17 SSR 2 Output 2 None 0 108 1 24 6C 1 18 Process 3 Output 3 None 0 108 1 25 6C 1 19 Form A Relay 4 Output 4 None 0 108 1 26 6C 1 1A Form C Relay 5 corresponding output Device Information UINT SERIES PD with EtherNet IP Addressing Information rev c 0 oO Name and Description Range Scaling Iterations Default _ _ _EIP Decimal Hex Modbus EIP Data Type _ Access Analog Input 1 to 4 Counts Analog Input 1 108 1 1 6C 1 1 1001 1002 o E sa6 Alon nut eee ee we Analog Input 4 108 1 4 6C 1 4 1007 1008 Analog Out 1 to 4 Process Value Analog Output 1 108 1 13 6C 1 D 1023 1024 Displays the process output value for the Bauicelninaation 30 000 000 to 30 000 000 Analog Output 2 108 1 14 6C 1 E 1025 1026 DINT corre

Series PD English User`s Manual Rev A

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents